Annual Report & Accounts 2013
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Contents
A. Strategic report
B. Corporate governance
C. Independent auditor’s report
D. The accounts
A1 Chairman’s statement
A2 Business model and strategy
A2.1 The Group’s business
A2.2 Principal risks and uncertainties
A3 Chief Executive’s review
A3.1 Financial review
A3.2 Business review
A3.3 Funding review
A4 Going concern
A5 Corporate social responsibility
A5.1 Employees
A5.2 Environmental policy
A5.3 Social, community and human rights
A6 Approval of strategic report
B1 Board of directors
B2 Corporate governance
B2.1 Audit and Compliance Committee
B2.2 Nomination Committee
B3 Directors’ remuneration report
B3.1 Statement by the Chairman
B3.2 Policy report
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration
B4 Directors’ report
B5 Statement of directors’ responsibilities
D1 The accounts
D1.1 Consolidated income statement
D1.2 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
D1.3 Consolidated balance sheet
D1.4 Company balance sheet
D1.5 Consolidated cash fl ow statement
D1.6 Company cash fl ow statement
D1.7 Statement of movements in equity
D2 Notes to the accounts
E. Appendices to the annual report
Contacts
6
8
8
9
11
11
13
15
17
18
18
21
23
26
28
30
34
36
38
38
39
51
69
72
74
79
81
81
82
83
84
84
85
86
148
150
CAUTIONARY STATEMENT
Sections of this Annual Report, including but not limited to the Directors’ Report, the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Remuneration Report may contain forward-looking
statements with respect to certain of the plans and current goals and expectations relating to the future fi nancial condition, business performance and results of the Group. These
have been made by the directors in good faith using information available up to the date on which they approved this report. By their nature, all forward-looking statements involve
risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances that are beyond the control of the Group and depend upon circumstances that may or may not occur
in the future. There are a number of factors that could cause actual future fi nancial conditions, business performance, results or developments to differ materially from the plans,
goals and expectations expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements and forecasts. Nothing in this document should be construed as a profi t forecast.
Financial highlights
£105.4m
£95.5m
£359.8m
pre-tax profi t
up 10.4%
2012
2013
buy-to-let
advances
up 90.5%
£188.9m
2012
2013
Return on equity increased to 10.2% (2012: 9.3%)
£92.8m
invested in consumer loan portfolios in the period
Earnings per share
up 17.4% from 24.2p in 2012 28.4p
7.2p
Total dividend
up 20% from 6.0p in 2012
Underlying profi t before taxation
Profi t before taxation
Profi t after taxation
Total loan assets
Shareholders’ funds
Net asset value per share
Earnings per share
- basic
- diluted
Dividend per ordinary share
2013
£m
104.1
105.4
85.2
8,801.5
873.3
2013
288p
28.4p
27.5p
7.2p
2012
£m
94.2
95.5
72.2
8,694.6
803.5
2012
269p
24.2p
23.5p
6.0p
2011
£m
81.1
80.8
59.6
8,724.2
742.0
2011
250p
20.2p
19.6p
4.0p
2010
£m
66.1
71.8
53.9
8,911.2
692.0
2010
234p
18.3p
17.8p
3.6p
2009
£m
45.3
54.3
41.1
9,314.3
650.5
2009
220p
13.9p
13.7p
3.3p
The derivation of underlying profi t before taxation is described in Appendix B.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
3
t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
i
.
A
A. Strategic report
A1
Chairman’s statement
A2
Business model and strategy
A2.1
A2.2
The Group’s business
Principal risks and uncertainties
A3
Chief Executive’s review
A3.1
A3.2
A3.3
Financial review
Business review
Funding review
A4
Going concern
A5
Corporate social responsibility
A5.1
A5.2
A5.3
Employees
Environmental policy
Social, community and human rights
A6
Approval of strategic report
6
8
8
9
11
11
13
15
17
18
18
21
23
26
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
5
A1. Chairman’s statement
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
Bob Dench
Chairman
The year ended 30 September 2013 has been a successful period for the Group, the business
has performed strongly and signifi cant progress has been made in laying the foundations for
further, sustainable growth for the future. Profi ts have grown strongly to a record level for the
Group and our portfolio of loans, including acquired assets, continues to perform well. Other
key performance metrics show trends consistent with recent periods: organic cash generation
remains strong; redemptions remain low; and, across the portfolio, credit performance is strong,
in line with our expectations.
Asset growth has also been achieved in the year, with loan assets and investments increasing
to £8,825.3 million from £8,703.7 million a year earlier. Our Idem Capital portfolio acquisitions
business added £92.8 million of new investments during the year and a further £13.5 million
shortly after the year end. In Paragon Mortgages, buy-to-let loan completions nearly doubled to
£359.8 million and, in our Moorgate loans servicing business, agreements to manage two new
portfolios were completed.
The year has seen signifi cant investment aimed at securing growth in future periods. This
investment has taken two forms, fi rst, increasing funding capacity for the existing businesses
and, second, undertaking preparatory work to establish new business activities.
On funding, warehouse capacity for buy-to-let lending has been increased in the year
to £450.0 million. This amount was considerably in excess of the funding requirements of
the mortgage business at the start of the year but, together with the success of the Paragon
Mortgages (No. 17) and Paragon Mortgages (No. 18) securitisations during the year, has provided
the capacity to allow Paragon Mortgages to signifi cantly increase its lending activity. In addition,
the Group completed its fi rst retail bond offering in March, a £60.0 million issue maturing in 2020,
which, together with our organic cashfl ow, will support growth in both Paragon Mortgages and
Idem Capital going forward.
On new business activities, we have previously commented on our desire to recommence
consumer lending, which we expect to operate through a new banking subsidiary to be
established within the Group. This remains our objective and preparations for the new bank are
well advanced.
During the year ended 30 September 2013 the Group’s profi t before taxation increased by
10.4% to £105.4 million (2012: £95.5 million). Underlying profi t, before fair value items, increased
by 10.5% to £104.1 million for the year (2012: £94.2 million).
Earnings per share were 28.4p (2012: 24.2p), the increase of 17.4% from last year refl ecting the
improved profi ts earned by the Group and the reduction in the tax rate. The increase in profi t has
also improved the Group’s return on equity to 10.2% from 9.3% for the previous year (note 5).
The Group’s strategic focus has remained unchanged: to generate growth through
our buy-to-let origination franchise and through investment in loan portfolios; to exploit new
opportunities, including the establishment of a banking subsidiary to undertake consumer
lending, fi nanced primarily by retail deposits; and to maintain close management of the existing
loan portfolio, which continued to perform well in the year.
In view of the results achieved and in line with the new dividend policy announced last
year, the Board has proposed a fi nal dividend of 4.8p per share (2012: 4.5p) which, when
added to the interim dividend of 2.4p, gives a total dividend of 7.2p per share for the year
(2012: 6.0p), an increase of 20.0%, covered 3.9 times by earnings (note 5). Subject to
approval at the Annual General Meeting on 6 February 2014, the dividend will be paid
on 10 February 2014, by reference to a record date of 10 January 2014.
6
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
STRATEGIC REPORT
During the year ended 30 September 2013 the UK Government issued new requirements requiring
all companies to produce a strategic report, with additional requirements for listed companies. This
must cover such matters as the Group’s development and performance in the year and its position
at the year end. Section A of this Annual Report and Accounts, including this statement and the
Chief Executives review, comprises the Group’s Strategic Report. We will be among the fi rst to report
under the new rules, which were only published in the latter part of the fi nancial year, with much of the
guidance still under development. Therefore we expect these disclosures to develop as time goes on
and welcome any comments.
“The business has
performed strongly
and signifi cant
progress has been
made in laying the
foundations for
further, sustainable
growth for the future.”
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
The Board of Directors is committed to the principles of corporate governance contained in the UK Corporate Governance Code
(‘Code’) issued by the Financial Reporting Council in September 2012, which came in to force for this fi nancial year. The Group’s
disclosures in respect of Corporate Governance (Section B2) have been revised in the light of the new Code, including expanded
disclosures on the work of the Audit and Compliance Committee, and information on directors’ remuneration is provided in the
new form required by the Department of Business, Innovation and Skills (Section B3).
BOARD CHANGES
Nick Keen, who has been Finance Director since 1995, has signalled his intention to retire and will be stepping down from the
Board on 31 May 2014 following the half-yearly results. Nick has been an outstanding member of the team over the years, ably
directing a number of our corporate acquisitions, including Universal Credit, Colonial Finance and Britannic Money, many of
Paragon’s early portfolio acquisitions and all of the Group’s fi nance raising activities during the period since his appointment. We
are pleased to be able to report that Nick’s services will be retained as chairman of the Idem division.
Richard Woodman, currently Director - Corporate Development, will take over as Finance Director on 31 May 2014. Richard, who
is a member of the Chartered Institute of Management Accountants, joined the Group in 1989 and has held a number of senior
strategic and fi nancial roles, including having had line responsibility for internal audit and serving as Director of Business Analysis
and Planning, prior to being appointed to the Board in February 2012. Richard has worked closely with Nick over many years and
the Board is confi dent of a smooth transition of responsibilities.
STAFF
The excellent progress we have made during the year would not have been achieved without the hard work and dedication of our
staff and my fellow directors. I thank them all for their efforts.
CONCLUSION
The year ended 30 September 2013 has been a period of strong performance across the Group’s activities. The Group has
earned record profi ts, expanded key business areas, increased funding for new business and made preparations for the launch
of a new bank, subject to regulatory approvals, to recommence consumer lending within the Group. The Board looks forward
confi dently to continuing the growth of the business in 2014.
ROBERT G DENCH
Chairman
26 November 2013
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
7
A2. Business model and strategy
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A2.1 The Group’s business
The Group is a listed FTSE-350 company, specialising in consumer fi nance and operating only in the United Kingdom. It is the UK’s leading
specialist lender of buy-to-let mortgages to professional landlords and residential property investors as well as an active acquirer of loan assets
and portfolios and a loan servicing provider for third party clients. It operates on a centralised basis with most of the employees based in its
offi ces in Solihull, West Midlands.
The Group’s income
The Group’s income is derived from interest, fees and similar charges arising from its investments in fi rst mortgages and consumer loans
and fees charged to third parties for administering similar loans on their behalf. The Group’s servicing capabilities are organised to refl ect the
differing operational requirements of these two classes of assets and therefore these are the segments used by the Group to describe its
business in this Annual Report.
Generation of assets
The Group currently generates new assets through two operations:
•
Paragon Mortgages, which originates new buy-to-let mortgage loans, focussing on professional landlords, through its Paragon Mortgages
and Mortgage Trust brands; and
•
Idem Capital, which purchases UK debt portfolios from other lenders and invests in similar arrangements led by third parties.
In the past the Group was an active lender in other consumer credit markets, notably residential mortgages, car fi nance and second charge
lending and the Group’s assets still include some balances generated by these operations.
The Group is currently making preparations to re-enter the car fi nance and second charge markets under the Paragon Car Finance and
Paragon Personal Finance brands.
The Group continues to keep the consumer fi nance market as a whole under review to consider whether lending in any new product areas
should be introduced.
Funding the business
The Group’s main source of funding for its originated assets is through securitisation, which provides long term matched funding for the book
at LIBOR linked interest rates. The Group pioneered this technique in the UK in 1987 and has issued 56 securitisation deals since that time.
Before securitisation assets are funded through committed bank facilities.
The Group’s intention is to fund its new consumer lending primarily through retail deposits to be accepted through a banking subsidiary, and
the necessary regulatory authorities for this are being sought.
The working capital of the Group is provided by equity, corporate and retail bonds. The Group’s funding mix is kept under review, bearing in
mind the cost and availability of appropriate sources of fi nance.
Profi tability of the business
The profi tability of the business relies on:
• careful management of loan accounts to increase retention and reduce levels of delinquency;
•
vigilance in the underwriting and loan acquisition processes to mitigate losses;
8
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
• appropriate pricing of new advances or purchased loans;
• arranging appropriate funding sources to sustain the business; and
• maintaining control of operating costs.
A2.2 Principal risks and uncertainties
There are a number of potential risks and uncertainties which could have a material impact on the Group’s performance and could cause actual
results to differ materially from expected and historical results.
The Group’s system of risk management, which includes the Credit Committee and Asset and Liabilities Committee (‘ALCO’), a dedicated
Group Risk function, risk review and an active internal audit function, is monitored by the Audit and Compliance Committee as described in
the ‘Corporate governance’ section of this Annual Report (section B2).
The principal risks inherent in the Group’s business model, described in section A2.1, include the following:
Economic environment
A further deterioration in the general economy may adversely affect all aspects of the Group’s business. Adverse economic conditions might
increase the number of borrowers that default on their loans or adversely affect funding structures, which may in turn increase the Group’s
costs and could result in losses on some of the Group’s assets, or restrict the ability of the Group to develop in the future.
The general economic factors affecting the Group in the period going forward, together with the steps taken by the Group’s management to
address these issues are described in more detail in the Chairman’s statement in section A1 and the Chief Executive’s review in section A3.
Changes in interest rates may adversely affect the Group’s net income and profi tability. The steps taken by the Group to mitigate against the
long term effects of interest rate movements, through the structuring of its products and the use of hedging procedures are described in note
6 to the accounts.
Credit risk
As a primary lender the Group faces credit risk as an inherent component of its lending and asset purchase activities. Adverse changes in the
credit quality of the Group’s borrowers, a general deterioration in UK economic conditions or adverse changes arising from systematic risks in
UK and global fi nancial systems could reduce the recoverability and value of the Group’s assets.
The Group’s approach to the management of credit risk and the systems in place to mitigate that risk on both originated and purchased assets
are described in the section of note 6 to the accounts entitled ‘Credit risk’.
Funding risk
The Group relies on its access to sources of funding to fi nance the origination of new business, portfolio acquisitions and working capital. If
access to funding became restricted, either through market movements or regulatory or governmental action, this might result in the scaling
back or cessation of some business lines.
The Group, through ALCO, seeks to mitigate this risk by investigating alternative sources of fi nance which are, or might become, available to
the Group and by keeping its funding and working capital position under review.
The Group’s capital position and its policies in respect of capital management are described in note 5 to the accounts. These policies and their
application are described more fully in the section of the Chief Executive’s review headed ‘Capital management’ (within section A3.3).
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
9
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A2.2 Principal risks and uncertainties continued
Operational risk
The activities of the Group subject it to operational risks relating to its ability to implement and maintain effective systems to process the high
volume of transactions with customers. A signifi cant breakdown of the IT systems of the Group might adversely impact the ability of the Group
to operate its business effectively.
To address these risks, the Group’s internal audit function carries out targeted reviews of critical systems to ensure that they remain adequate
for their purpose. The Group has a business continuity plan, accredited under the International Standard ISO 22301, which is kept under
regular review and is designed to ensure that any breakdown in systems would not cause signifi cant disruption to the business.
Competitor risk
The Group faces strong competition in all of the core markets in which it operates. There is a danger that its profi tability and /or market share
may be impaired.
To mitigate this risk the Group maintains relationships with its customers, business introducers and other signifi cant participants in the markets
in which it is active, as well as being active in industry-wide organisations and initiatives. This enables market trends to be identifi ed and
addressed within the relevant business strategy.
Governmental, legislative and regulatory risk
The market sectors to which the Group supplies products, and the capital markets from which it obtains much of its funding, have been subject
to intervention by United Kingdom Government, European Union and other regulatory bodies. Current regulatory developments are discussed
in the section of the Chief Executive’s review headed ‘Regulation’ in section A3.2. To the extent that such actions disadvantage the Group,
when compared to other market participants, they present a risk to the Group.
In order to mitigate this risk the Group has been active in explaining its position to the authorities in order that it is not inadvertently disadvantaged.
In order to ensure compliance with the various regulatory regimes it is, or may become, subject to, the Group maintains a compliance function
which reviews procedures, examines compliance with them and evaluates knowledge levels across relevant functions.
Management
The success of the Group is dependent on recruiting and retaining skilled senior management and personnel and failure to do so would put
the Group’s ability to successfully carry out its plans at risk.
The Group’s employment policies, which are designed to mitigate this exposure and ensure that an appropriately skilled workforce is, and
remains, in place are described within section A5.1.
Other fi nancial risks
The Group’s exposure to other fi nancial risks, including liquidity risk and foreign currency risk, and the procedures in place to mitigate those
risks are described in detail in note 6 to the accounts.
10
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
A3. Chief Executive’s review
During the year ended 30 September 2013 the Group has successfully pursued its strategy to
deliver shareholder value through purchasing portfolios, developing new lending, entering into
new servicing agreements and continuing the careful management of the extant portfolios.
Nigel Terrington
Chief Executive
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A3.1 Financial review
CONSOLIDATED RESULTS
For the year ended 30 September 2013
Interest receivable
Interest payable and similar charges
Net interest income
Other operating income
Total operating income
Operating expenses
Provisions for losses
Underlying profi t
Fair value net gains
Operating profi t being profi t on ordinary activities before taxation
Tax charge on profi t on ordinary activities
Profi t on ordinary activities after taxation
Dividend – rate per share for the year
Basic earnings per share
Diluted earnings per share
2013
£m
272.6
(111.3)
161.3
16.6
177.9
(58.6)
(15.2)
104.1
1.3
105.4
(20.2)
85.2
7.2p
28.4p
27.5p
2012
£m
293.8
(136.0)
157.8
12.4
170.2
(51.9)
(24.1)
94.2
1.3
95.5
(23.3)
72.2
6.0p
24.2p
23.5p
The Group is organised into two major operating divisions: First Mortgages, which includes the buy-to-let and owner-occupied fi rst mortgage
assets and other sources of income derived from fi rst charge mortgages; and Consumer Finance, which includes secured loans, car fi nance,
retail fi nance, unsecured loans and other sources of income derived from consumer loans. Both divisions include internally originated and
acquired assets. These divisions are the basis on which the Group reports primary segmental information.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
11
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A3.1 Financial review continued
The underlying operating profi ts of these business segments are detailed fully in Appendix B to the annual report and are summarised below.
Underlying operating profi t
First Mortgages
Consumer Finance
2013
£m
64.4
39.7
104.1
2012
£m
61.6
32.6
94.2
Net interest income increased by 2.2% to £161.3 million (2012: £157.8 million), refl ecting asset growth in the First Mortgages and
Consumer Finance divisions but also the cost in the year of increasing funding capacity to support future growth in the Paragon Mortgages
and Idem Capital businesses. The combined cost of increasing the warehouse facilities and issuing the retail bond was £3.6 million, charged
within interest payable.
Other operating income was £16.6 million for the year, compared with £12.4 million in 2012, the increase of 33.9% refl ecting, principally, an
increased level of third party fee income both from new administration arrangements and from older contracts as incentive fees began to
be earned.
Operating expenses during the year were 12.9% higher at £58.6 million (2012: £51.9 million). There were three principal reasons for this: the
charge for share based payments increased by £1.2 million, principally caused by the impact of the increase in the Company’s share price
during the year; direct costs of £1.3 million were incurred in preparation for the establishment of a bank subsidiary within the Group to fund
consumer fi nance originations; and employment costs increased as additional staff were employed to manage the growth in business activity,
particularly the administration of loans acquired or serviced for third parties in the period.
The cost:income ratio was impacted by these additional charges and by the deduction from net interest income in respect of the cost
of carrying the new funding lines as outlined above, increasing to 32.9% for the year from 30.5% in the year ended 30 September 2012
(Appendix A). The increase was in line with expectations and the absorption now of these additional costs should support future income
growth. On an underlying basis, excluding these additional factors, the ratio reduces to an underlying measure of 30.9% (Appendix A). This is
similar to the level for the last year, and remains signifi cantly below the industry average. The Board remains focused on controlling operating
costs through the application of rigorous budgeting, management reporting and monitoring procedures.
The charge for impairment provisions of £15.2 million was 36.9% lower than the charge of £24.1 million for 2012, with reductions in both
the First Mortgages and Consumer Finance divisions arising from improved arrears performance and the impact of rising house prices on
security valuations. As a percentage of loans to customers (note 31) the charge has reduced to 0.17% (2012: 0.28%). Low interest rates
have increased affordability for customers, reducing the incidence of new arrears and assisting the correction of past arrears. The loan books
continue to be carefully managed and the credit performance of the buy-to-let book continues to be exemplary.
Yield curve movements during the year resulted in hedging instrument fair value net gains of £1.3m (2012: gains of £1.3 million), which do not
affect cash fl ow. As the fair value movements of hedged assets or liabilities are expected to trend to zero over time, this item is merely a timing
difference. The Group remains economically and appropriately hedged.
Cash generation has remained strong over the period and in addition the Group raised £60.0 million from the retail bond issue in March. After
investing signifi cantly in both asset purchases and in the development of our buy-to-let lending business (detailed below), free cash balances
stood at £170.8 million at 30 September 2013 (2012: £127.7 million).
Corporation tax has been charged at an effective tax rate of 19.2%, compared to 24.4% in 2012, the decrease being attributable primarily to
the reduction in the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK and a consequent revaluation of deferred tax liabilities.
Profi ts after taxation of £85.2 million (2012: £72.2 million) have been transferred to shareholders’ funds, which totalled £873.3 million at the
year-end (2012: £803.5 million).
12
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A3.2 Business review
OPERATING SEGMENTS
First Mortgages
Buy-to-let loan completions increased by 90.5% to £359.8 million for the year (2012: £188.9 million). Application volumes increased over the
year, with the pipeline of applications and offers outstanding totalling £231.9 million at 30 September 2013 (2012: £129.9 million). The credit
quality of the new lending business written in the year has remained excellent.
The increase in available warehouse capacity and the success of the Group’s securitisation activity has ensured that the Group’s fi rst mortgage
business has been well placed over the year to capitalise on the strength of the private rented sector and the renewed strength of the housing
market, which has become evident during 2013. The Group has maintained two distinct propositions, one targeting professional landlords and
the other private investor landlords, which together have ensured that we have maintained a strong market position through the year.
The housing market has seen a strong recovery in 2013 albeit against the background of an extended period of low levels of activity and
fl at house prices. It is now clear that the combination of a general improvement in the economy, higher levels of consumer confi dence and
continuing government stimulus in the form of the Help-to-Buy and Funding for Lending schemes, have prompted increased levels of house
purchase and re-mortgage transactions, which in turn have led to increases in house prices in most regions. By August 2013, house purchase
transactions reported by HMRC had reached, at 107,000 a month, the highest level since December 2007. Transactions in the quarter ended
30 September 2013 were up 21.9% on the comparable period last year, whilst mortgage advances in that quarter were, according to estimates
made by the Council of Mortgage Lenders (‘CML’), 32% up on the same quarter in 2012.
The Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors reported in its September Residential Market Survey that tenant demand and new landlord
instructions continue to increase. This is consistent with the information published by the CML which reports further growth in new buy-to-let
lending over the year with completions stronger in the quarters ended 30 June and 30 September 2013 (£4.8bn and £5.7bn respectively),
lending in the quarter ended September being up 42.5% on a year earlier. The arrears performance of the buy-to-let sector continues to be
better than the owner-occupied market (note 6).
At 30 September 2013, the buy-to-let portfolio was £8,324.4 million, compared with £8,196.4 million a year earlier. The redemption rate
on the back book remained low at 2.5% for the year (2012: 2.2%) with landlords continuing to display a long-term commitment to property
investment, whilst alternative offerings from other lenders remain unattractive as a result of generally higher funding and capital costs.
The credit performance of the portfolio over the year continued to be exemplary, with the percentage of loans three months or more in
arrears (including acquired loans and receivership cases but excluding possessions and receivership cases held for sale) standing at 0.35%
at 30 September 2013 (30 September 2012: 0.48%) and remains considerably better than the comparable market average of 1.16% as
recorded by the CML at that date (30 September 2012: 1.51%).
With the strong credit performance over the year and with increased house prices impacting on security values, the impairment charge
attributable to First Mortgages decreased to £6.8 million for the year from £12.4 million for 2012. At 30 September 2013 there were
1,395 properties across all portfolios where a receiver had been appointed (30 September 2012: 1,504). Of those available for letting, 94.8%
were let (30 September 2012: 94.2%).
The owner-occupied book reduced to £77.4 million from £99.2 million during the year ended 30 September 2013 and performed in line with
the Group’s expectations. Save for the management of this book in run-off, there has been little activity in recent years in this area as the Group
has focused on other lending markets, portfolio acquisitions and other sources of revenue generation.
Consumer Finance
At 30 September 2013, the total loans outstanding on the Consumer Finance books were £399.7 million, compared with £399.0 million
at 30 September 2012, as portfolio purchases (covered below) have balanced redemptions across the portfolios. The performance of the
Consumer Finance book, including the acquired assets, remains satisfactory and in line with our expectations.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
13
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A3.2 Business review continued
The Group’s secured loan portfolio at 30 September 2013, including the acquired assets, was £248.4 million (2012: £279.9 million). The
unsecured loan, retail fi nance and car fi nance portfolios, including the acquired assets, totalled £151.3 million at 30 September 2013
(30 September 2012: £119.1 million).
The Group’s increased exposure to consumer loans in recent years has primarily resulted from portfolio purchases. Preparations are
currently under way to recommence consumer lending in a new banking subsidiary. Further details on the progress of this development are
set out below.
PORTFOLIO ACQUISITIONS AND SERVICING
A major area of strategic focus for the Group is the acquisition of loan portfolios through Idem Capital and the servicing of third party loan
portfolios as opportunities are created through the ongoing process of fi nancial institutions disposing of loan assets. The Group is fi rmly
established as a mainstream purchaser of consumer debt in the UK, in addition to taking advantage of ad-hoc deleveraging-led opportunities
as a range of large institutions seek to rationalise their balance sheets.
In addition to assets acquired in its own right, Idem, through its sister companies, Moorgate Loan Servicing and Arden Credit Management, has
established two new servicing contracts with co-investment partners during the year. These add volume to the Group’s servicing operations
and enhance earnings. The contribution to operating profi ts from these activities increased to £33.3 million (2012: £26.3 million) during the
fi nancial year. Further possible investment opportunities are currently under review and the Group’s strong track record in loan servicing, risk
management and portfolio investment positions it well to continue to exploit similar opportunities as they arise.
Idem Capital
The Group’s investment division, Idem Capital, invests in loan portfolios either as principal, where Idem acquires pools in its own right, or as
co-investor alongside other partners with, typically, Moorgate Loan Servicing appointed to act as servicer. Co-investing has the potential for
higher returns where the Group also derives income from servicing the loans within the underlying portfolio. Investments are made only after
signifi cant due diligence work on the portfolio and sensitivity testing of potential returns.
During the year Idem Capital purchased £71.9 million of unsecured loan assets and invested a further £20.9 million in loan portfolios through
structured entities as a co-investor. At 30 September 2013, the balance outstanding in respect of investments in portfolios was £193.7 million
(2012: £135.4 million). A further £13.5 million was invested in loan portfolios after the year-end.
Moorgate Loan Servicing
The Group’s third party loan servicing business operates through Moorgate Loan Servicing and its recoveries division, Arden Credit Management,
utilising our core administration and collections skills. Our experience in loan management established over many years has enabled us to
extend this service to our third party clients, providing signifi cant added value to the performance of their loan portfolios.
During the year Moorgate Loan Servicing has assumed the servicing of further portfolios, comprising 50,000 accounts, for third parties
(2012: 149,000 accounts) with the result that 43.8% of accounts under management by the Group at 30 September 2013 were managed on
behalf of third parties (2012: 49.9%). At the end of the year, an agreement to take on the servicing of a further 26,300 third party accounts was
in place and these accounts were migrated on to the Group’s systems during October 2013.
14
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
NEW BUSINESS ACTIVITIES
The Group has applied to the Prudential Regulatory Authority (‘PRA’) and the Financial Conduct Authority (‘FCA’) for authority to establish a
banking subsidiary. Subject to regulatory approval, the proposed bank will take deposits and make, initially, car and second mortgage loans,
with other product lines to be established in due course. Operational preparations, including executive appointments, management structures
and system developments, are all at an advanced stage. Our expectation, subject to approval, will be to launch the bank during the fi rst quarter
of 2014. Further progress information will be provided to shareholders in due course.
REGULATION
The proposed European Directive on credit agreements relating to residential property, which may impose additional disclosure and other
requirements for all mortgage lending to consumers secured on residential property, has yet to be concluded. It has been reported that the UK
Government has negotiated an exemption from the Directive for buy-to-let lending but this has yet to be formally ratifi ed. We will continue to
maintain an active dialogue with the UK and European regulatory authorities as these proposals develop.
In the UK the PRA, FCA and Bank of England have now variously assumed the functions of the Financial Services Authority and will, subject to
approval, regulate our proposed banking subsidiary. With effect from April 2014, responsibility for the regulation of consumer credit, including
second charge mortgage lending, passes from the Offi ce of Fair Trading to the FCA, which has recently published draft conduct of business
rules for the sector. These rules will apply not only to the Group’s proposed consumer lending operations, but also to our third party servicing
activities and closed consumer fi nance books.
A3.3 Funding review
BORROWINGS
On 5 March 2013 the Group issued £60.0 million of 6.0% sterling bonds due December 2020. The bonds, listed on the London Stock
Exchange Order Book for Retail Bonds, were issued to provide additional working capital for the Group. This was the initial transaction under
a £1.0 billion Euro Medium Term Note Programme announced in January 2013. The bonds allow us to diversify our funding base and extend
the tenor of our borrowings.
On 25 October 2012, the Group completed a £200.0 million securitisation of buy-to-let loans, through Paragon Mortgages (No. 17) PLC
(‘PM 17’). PM 17 comprises £175.0 million of AAA rated notes, £10.5 million of AA rated notes and £10.0 million of A rated notes at margins
of 135, 190 and 290 basis points over three month LIBOR respectively. £4.5 million of subordinated notes were retained by the Group, which
also invested £6.0 million in the fi rst loss fund, bringing the Group’s total investment in PM 17 to £10.5 million, or 5.25% of the issue amount.
On 23 September 2013, the Group completed a £273.0 million securitisation of buy-to-let loans, through Paragon Mortgages (No. 18) PLC
(‘PM 18’). PM 18 comprises £238.1 million of AAA rated notes, £15.7 million of AA rated notes and £13.7 million of A rated notes at margins
of 115, 170 and 240 basis points over three month LIBOR respectively. £5.5 million of subordinated notes were retained by the Group, which
also invested £8.19 million in the fi rst loss fund, bringing the Group’s total investment in PM 18 to £13.69 million, or 5.0% of the issue amount.
The pricing of the PM 17 and PM 18 transactions refl ected the strong credit profi le of the Group’s buy-to-let assets and our experience as
an issuer of high quality bonds in the mortgage backed securities market. PM 17 was the fi rst buy-to-let securitisation to offer single A rated
bonds since 2008 and these deals were only the second and third securitisations of buy-to-let loans since the credit crunch. They were also
the Group’s 55th and 56th securitisations since pioneering the methodology in 1987. We plan to return to the securitisation markets regularly
as business volumes increase.
The Group uses two warehouse facilities to originate mortgage loans prior to arranging term funding in the securitisation markets. The
£200.0 million revolving warehouse provided by Macquarie Bank was renewed and extended for a further two years in November 2012 and
the amount available for drawing increased to £250.0 million, while an additional £200.0 million revolving warehouse facility, provided by the
wholesale division of Lloyds Bank, was utilised for the fi rst time in April 2013. Dependant on market conditions and our expectations for
mortgage volumes, additional warehousing capacity may be sought in due course.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
15
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A3.3 Funding review continued
CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
The Group has continued to enjoy strong cash generation during the year. Free cash balances were £170.8 million at the year-end
(30 September 2012: £127.7 million) after investments to support new buy-to-let originations and acquisitions by Idem Capital. The Company
sees opportunities going forward to deploy capital for new lending activities, which should continue to increase, and to invest further amounts
in loan portfolios through Idem Capital as banks and other fi nancial institutions continue to dispose of assets. These cash balances, together
with future operational cashfl ow, will support the Group’s growth through investment in these areas as well as providing returns to shareholders
through dividends.
The Board keeps under review the appropriate level of capital for the business to meet its operational requirements and strategic development
objectives and in 2012 announced a new progressive dividend policy so that, by 2016 and thereafter, dividend cover will be maintained in the
range 3.0 to 3.5 times.
In pursuance of this policy, and in view of the strong position of the Group and its confi dence in the prospects for the business, the Board
proposes subject to approval at the Annual General Meeting on 6 February 2014, a fi nal dividend of 4.8p per share which, when added to the
interim dividend of 2.4p, gives a dividend of 7.2p per share for the year, an increase of 20.0% from 2012.
In accordance with our usual practice, we will be proposing at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting a special resolution seeking authority
from shareholders for the Company to purchase up to 30.5 million of its own shares (10% of the issued share capital). It is customary for
companies to seek such authority but we would not expect to utilise the authority unless, in the light of market conditions prevailing at the time,
we consider that to do so would enhance earnings per share and would be in the best interests of shareholders generally. Given the operational
and strategic opportunities described above and the enhanced dividend policy, the Board has no current intention of using this authority.
CONCLUSION
Paragon has made signifi cant progress in 2013 delivering record profi ts, whilst also laying the foundations for further sustainable growth in
the future. Buy-to-let lending volumes have grown by over 90% as landlords feel increasingly optimistic about the housing market and the
prospects for the private rental sector. At the same time, the Group has continued to build on its highly regarded expertise in the debt purchase
market, making further signifi cant investments through Idem Capital.
The Group’s actions to increase its warehouse facilities, its successful securitisations and the new retail bond programme all combine to provide
substantial capacity to support further growth in our existing business areas. With our banking licence application making good progress and
our plans for a return to consumer fi nance lending now well advanced, the Group is well positioned for further growth in the year ahead.
NIGEL S TERRINGTON
Chief Executive
26 November 2013
16
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A4. Going concern
The business activities of the Group, its current operations and those factors likely to affect its future results and development, together with
a description of its fi nancial position and funding position, are described in the Chairman’s statement in section A1 and Chief Executive’s
review in section A3. The principal risks and uncertainties affecting the Group, and the steps taken to mitigate these risks are described in
section A2.2.
Note 5 to the accounts includes an analysis of the Group’s working capital position and policies, while note 6 includes a detailed description of
its funding structures, its use of fi nancial instruments, its fi nancial risk management objectives and policies and its exposure to credit, interest
rate and liquidity risk. Critical accounting estimates affecting the results and fi nancial position disclosed in this annual report are discussed in
note 4.
As described under ‘Accountability’ in section B2, the Group has a formalised process of budgeting, reporting and review, which provides
information to the directors which is used to ensure the adequacy of resources available for the Group to meet its business objectives.
The securitisation funding structures described in note 6 ensure that a substantial proportion of the Group’s originated loan portfolio is
match-funded to maturity. Repayment of the securitisation borrowings is restricted to funds generated by the underlying assets and there is
limited recourse to the Group’s general funds. Recent and current loan originations utilising the Group’s available warehouse facilities described
in note 6 are refi nanced through securitisation from time to time. None of the Group’s debt matures before 2017, when the £110.0 million
corporate bond is repayable. During the year the Group raised a further £60.0 million of working capital though the issue of retail bonds and at
30 September 2013 had available free cash balances of £170.8 million. As a consequence the directors believe that the Group is well placed
to manage its business risks successfully.
After making enquiries, the directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group will have adequate resources to continue in operational
existence for the foreseeable future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the annual report
and accounts.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
17
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A5. Corporate social responsibility
The Group believes that the long-term interests of shareholders, employees and customers are best served by acting in a socially responsible
manner. As such, the Group ensures that a high standard of corporate governance is maintained.
A5.1 Employees
The welfare, development and engagement of the Group’s employees are central to developing a strong culture, with employee capability and
motivation acknowledged as being central to delivery of the Group’s strategy.
The Human Resources department actively works alongside the Group’s management to recruit, develop and retain capable people.
Equality and diversity
The Group is committed to providing a working environment in which employees feel valued and respected and are able to contribute to the
success of the business, and to employing a workforce that recognises the diversity of its customers. Employees are requested to co-operate
with the Group’s efforts to ensure the policy is fully implemented.
The Group’s aim is that its employees should be able to work in an environment free from discrimination, harassment and bullying, and that
employees, job applicants, customers, retailers, business introducers and suppliers should be treated fairly regardless of:
•
race, colour, nationality (including citizenship), ethnic or national origins
• gender, sexual orientation, marital or family status
•
religious or political beliefs or affi liations
• disability, impairment or age
•
real or suspected infection with HIV/AIDS
• membership of a trade union
and that they should not be disadvantaged by unjust or unfair conditions or requirements.
When responding to changes in its business, the Group seeks to minimise the requirement for compulsory redundancy, retraining and
redeploying employees wherever possible.
The Group aims to ensure that applications for employment from people with disabilities, and other under-represented groups, are given full
and fair consideration and that such people are given the same training, development and job opportunities as other employees. Every effort
is also made to retrain and support employees who suffer from disabilities during their employment, including the provision of fl exible working
to assist their re-entry into the workplace.
Flexible working is actively encouraged across all areas, to promote a work-life balance for individuals and to ensure that the Group retains the
skills and experience of its people.
Composition of the workforce is reviewed on an annual basis and employee satisfaction with equality of opportunity is monitored as part of the
regular employee feedback surveys. Human Resources policies are reviewed regularly to ensure that they are non-discriminatory and promote
equality of opportunity. In particular, recruitment, selection, promotion, training and development policies and practices are monitored to ensure
that all employees have the opportunity to train and develop according to their abilities.
18
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
Information on the composition of the workforce at the year end is summarised below:
Employees
(Number)
(Percentage)
Management grade employees (Number)
Senior managers
Directors
(Percentage)
(Number)
(Percentage)
(Number)
(Percentage)
2013
Females
490
56.5%
65
42.5%
3
18.8%
1
11.1%
2013
Males
378
43.5%
88
57.5%
13
81.2%
8
88.9%
2012
Females
436
58.1%
61
44.5%
3
20.0%
1
11.1%
2012
Males
314
41.9%
76
55.5%
12
80.0%
8
88.9%
Of these employees, ethnic minority employees comprised 12.4% of the workforce (2012: 11.3%) and 5.9% of management grade employees
(2012: 4.4%).
Training and development
The Group has been accredited under the ‘Investors in People’ scheme since 1997 and achieved the Gold Standard in March 2013, which
is currently held by only 3% of companies in the UK. This demonstrates the Group’s commitment to the training and development of its
employees. The appraisal system is designed to assist employees in developing their careers and to identify and provide appropriate training
opportunities, with all employees receiving a review at least annually. The appraisal system also provides a method to track individual progress
and identify opportunities to develop them into further roles, thereby supporting the Group’s overall succession planning objectives.
The corporate training and development strategy focuses on providing opportunities to develop all employees and is central to the achievement
of the Group’s business objectives. On average employees received 8.7 days training in the year (2012: 7.8 days).
Employees’ involvement
The directors recognise the benefi t of keeping employees informed of the progress of the business. The Group sponsors a People Forum,
attended by elected employee representatives from each area of the business, which exists primarily to facilitate communication and
dissemination of information throughout the Group and provides a means by which employees can be consulted on matters affecting them.
Employees are provided with regular information on the performance and plans of the Group, and the fi nancial and economic factors affecting
it, through information circulars and presentations.
The Company operates a Sharesave share option scheme and a profi t sharing scheme, both of which enable eligible employees to benefi t
from the performance of the business.
The directors encourage employee involvement at all levels through the appraisal process and communication between directors, managers,
teams and individual employees.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
19
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A5.1 Employees continued
Health and Safety policy
It is the Group’s policy to comply with the terms of the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974, and subsequent legislation, and to provide and
maintain a healthy and safe working environment. The health and safety objective of the Group is to minimise the number of instances of
occupational accidents and illnesses and ultimately achieve an accident-free workplace.
The Group recognises and accepts its duty to protect the health and safety of all visitors to its premises, including contractors and temporary
workers, as well as any members of the public who might be affected by our operations.
While the management of the Group will do all within its power to ensure the health and safety of its employees, it is recognised that health and
safety at work is the responsibility of each and every individual associated with the Group. It is the duty of each employee to take reasonable
care of their own and other people’s welfare and to report any situation which may pose a threat to the well-being of any other person.
Health and Safety policies and procedures are managed by the Group Services Division which liaises with senior management and Human
Resources as necessary.
All employees are provided with such equipment, information, training and supervision as is necessary to implement the policy in order to
achieve the above stated objective. The Group makes available such fi nances and resources deemed reasonable to implement this policy.
All injuries, however small, sustained by a person at work must be reported. Accident records are crucial to the effective monitoring and revision
of the policy and must therefore be accurate and comprehensive.
The Group recognises the civil and moral need to ensure that all employees adhere to this Health and Safety policy and is prepared to invoke
the disciplinary procedure in case of any deliberate disregard for the Health and Safety policy.
The Group’s Health and Safety policy is continually monitored and updated, particularly when changes in the scale or nature of our operations
occur. The policy is updated at least every twelve months.
A six monthly health and safety report is produced by the Head of Group Services for the Senior Management Group. ISO18001 certifi cation
has been obtained during 2013 and is audited every six months by an external consultant. In addition, a health and safety co-ordinator is
employed within Group Services to manage all health and safety records, including policies, procedures, risk assessments and training records.
20
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A5.2 Environmental policy
The Group is engaged in mortgage and consumer fi nance and arrears management and therefore its overall environmental impact is considered
to be low. The main environmental impacts for the Group are limited to universal environmental issues such as resource use, procurement in
offi ces and business travel.
The Group complies with all applicable laws and regulations relating to the environment and intends to align its environmental procedures with
the International Standard ISO 14001 during the course of the next fi nancial year. It operates a Green Charter, which:
• ensures all buildings occupied by the Group are managed effi ciently by its Facilities Team and Building Surveyor
• encourages employees to conserve energy
• promotes recycling by negotiating contracts and providing facilities to enable employees to re-cycle offi ce waste and other used products
•
•
•
•
•
•
controls business travel and provides opportunities for employees to travel to work in various ways; such as providing cycle racks
displays a Paragon Green Charter at all sites to encourage employees to be environmentally friendly at all times
ensures liaison with the local community
ensures that redundant IT equipment is disposed of within current directives / regulations (WEEE - Waste Electrical and Electronic
Equipment), recycling 98% of such equipment
ensures that all fl uorescent light tubes are disposed of in a safe manner, compliant with appropriate regulations
arranges for paper waste products to be recycled, securely, by third parties
The Green Charter is kept under continuous review by the Facilities team.
The Group’s paper based stationery is all procured from FSC certifi ed suppliers.
During the year the Group introduced a Cycle to Work scheme, enabling employees to obtain cycles at preferential rates for
commuting purposes.
The Group has been involved in no prosecutions, accidents or similar non-compliances in respect of environmental matters.
Performance indicators
The environmental key performance indicators for the Group, determined having regard to the Reporting Guidelines published by the
Department for Environment Food and Rural Affairs (DEFRA) in June 2013, are set out below.
The Group does not consider it has signifi cant environmental impacts under the headings ‘Resource Effi ciency and Materials’, ‘Emissions to
Land, Air and Water’ or ‘Biodiversity and Ecosystem Services’ set out in the Guidelines, due to the nature of its business activities.
This information is presented for the 12 months ended 30 September in each year and includes all entities included in the Group’s fi nancial
statements. Normalised data is based on total operating income of £177.9m (2012: £170.2m).
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
21
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A5.2 Environmental policy continued
Greenhouse gas (‘GHG’) emissions
Scope 1 (Direct emissions)
Combustion of fuel:
Operation of gas heating boilers
Petrol and diesel used by company cars
Operation of facilities:
Air conditioning systems
Scope 2 (Energy indirect emissions)
Directly purchased electricity
Total scope 1 and 2
2013
Tonnes
CO2
638
202
25
865
1,548
2,413
2012
Tonnes
CO2
626
328
28
982
1,521
2,503
Normalised tonnes - scope 1 and 2 CO2 per £m income
13.6
14.7
Scope 3 (Other indirect emissions)
Purchased goods and services
Fuel and energy related activities not included in scope 1 or 2
Water consumption
Waste generated in operations
Total scope 3
Total scopes 1, 2 and 3
Normalised tonnes scope 1,2 and 3 CO2 per £m income
281
8
18
307
272
11
28
311
2,720
2,814
15.3
16.5
The decrease in GHG emissions shown above is despite changes in the Group’s property profi le which have increased the fl oor space in use
by 22%, although the number of leased buildings was reduced in the year. This is in excess of both the growth in income and the increase
in average headcount of 13% as the Group positions itself to implement the business development plans detailed elsewhere in the Strategic
report. Additional space has also been allocated to support the Group’s Business Continuity plan. The principal expansion in the year was
in the Group’s Homer Road headquarters building, which had until recently been sub-divided and leased out. As a result of this, the building
management systems are not fully coordinated, leading to ineffi ciency. A project is in progress to align the systems, which should increase
effi ciency in the future. The Group has also retained the services of external energy consultants, to further address issues of consumption
and effi ciency.
Gas and electricity usage is based on consumption recorded on purchase invoices. Vehicle fuel usage is based on expense claims and
recorded mileage.
CO2 values above are calculated based on the DEFRA / DECC guidelines published in June 2013. CO2 values for the year ended
30 September 2012 have been restated for the revised conversion factors published by DEFRA / DECC.
The amounts shown above for total scope 1 and scope 2 emissions are those required to be reported under the Companies Act
(Strategic Report and Directors Reports) Regulations 2013. Other scope 3 emissions not reported above are not considered to be signifi cant.
22
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
Water usage
The Group’s water usage is limited to the consumption of piped water in the UK. No water is extracted directly. Water usage in the year
ended 30 September 2013 was 7,720m3 (2012: 10,099m3), based on consumption recorded on purchase invoices, a normalised amount of
43.4m3 per £m income (2012: 59.3m3 per £m income).
Waste
The Group’s waste output consists of general offi ce waste which includes a mixture of principally paper and cardboard with some wood,
plastics and metal. All of the Group’s waste is either recycled or sent to landfi ll.
Amounts of waste generated in the year ended 30 September 2013 and the methods of disposal are shown below.
Recycled
Landfi ll
2013
Tonnes
88
80
168
2012
Tonnes
82
134
216
Normalised tonnes per £m income
0.9
1.3
Waste generation data is based on volumes reported on disposal invoices. The Group provides facilities in its offi ces for recycling paper,
cardboard, newspapers, glass, plastics and aluminium and steel cans. Batteries, printer and photocopier cartridges are collected and sent
for recycling.
A5.3 Social, community and human rights
Commitment to our customers
The Group places the needs of customers at the heart of its day-to-day operations. With a commitment from the Board, fairness to our
customers is a key consideration and objective at all stages of the lifetime of a loan.
Treating Customers Fairly
The Group’s Treating Customers Fairly (‘TCF’) policy is central to our commitment to customers. In adopting the TCF principle we recognise
that fair treatment of our customers is about adding value to the service we offer by aiming to:
•
•
protect the interests of our customers at each stage of the product life cycle; and
meet, as best we can, the unique needs of each customer by offering a transparent, effi cient and professional service, constantly reviewing
our service to identify areas for improvement.
Our TCF policy follows Financial Conduct Authority (‘FCA’) guidance and is regularly reviewed and updated. We have a programme of training
on TCF for employees and we apply the TCF principles across both our regulated and non-regulated lending.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
23
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
A5.2 Social, community and human rights continued
Complaint handling
As part of our commitment to TCF we have adopted a complaint handling process that is compliant with the requirements of the FCA and
the best practice guidance issued by the Finance and Leasing Association. We view a complaint as an opportunity to improve our business.
We have dedicated and experienced complaint handling co-ordinators in each business area who work with our customers to ensure that we
handle the complaint, effi ciently and effectively.
Charitable contributions
The Group contributes to registered charities relating to fi nancial services or serving the local communities in which it operates. Contributions
of £917,000 (2012: £353,000) were made by the Group during the year to the work of the Foundation for Credit Counselling which operates
StepChange Debt Charity, formerly the Consumer Credit Counselling Service. The increase in contributions from the previous year refl ects the
numbers of acquired customers making use of the charity’s services. The Group has also contributed to charities throughout the year by way
of single donations.
Other charitable contributions made in the year totalled £21,000 (2012: £18,000). The Group’s main objective is to support children’s and
local charities, although no charity request is overlooked. During the last year the Group has helped many and varied charities and causes
such as: The Children’s Heart Foundation, Disability Aid Trust, Rotary Club of St Alphege Solihull, Kids in Action, Butterfl ies Children’s Charity,
Brainwave, Motor Neurone Disease, Kids in Action, Happy Days, Lupus, Action for Sick Children, Motability, The Brain Tumour Charity,
Second Chance, Myton Hospice, Strong Bones Charitable Trust, The Christie Charity, Chicks, Children with Cancer UK, Marie Curie Cancer
Care, Lowes Syndrome Trust, Zoe’s Place Baby Hospice, Shirley Lions Club, Guy’s and St Thomas Charity.
The Group also supports Paragon’s Charity Committee, consisting of volunteer employees, which organises a variety of fundraising
activities throughout the year. In 2012 £12,000 was raised for The Birmingham Children’s Hospital and The Alzheimer’s Society, while in
the fi rst nine months of 2013 £11,406 has been raised which will be shared between RSPCA Birmingham Animal Centre and Hospital and
MacMillan Cancer Support. All employees are given the opportunity to nominate a charity each year and a vote is carried out to select the
charity or charities to benefi t from the next year’s fundraising.
Taxation payments
The Group is resident and operates only in the United Kingdom and the amounts of its payments to UK national and local tax authorities in the
year, including PAYE and NI contributions deducted from employee wages and salaries was as follows:
Corporation tax
PAYE and National Insurance
VAT
Total national taxation
Business rates
2013
£m
22.0
15.9
0.4
38.3
1.2
39.5
2012
£m
17.0
11.8
0.6
29.4
1.1
30.5
24
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
Human rights
The Group operates exclusively in the UK and, as such, is subject to the European Convention on Human Rights and the UK Human Rights
Act 1998.
The Group respects all human rights and in conducting its business the Group regards those rights relating to non-discrimination, fair treatment
and respect for privacy to be the most relevant and to have the greatest potential impact on its key stakeholder groups of customers,
employees and suppliers.
The Board and the Group Director of Legal Services have overall responsibility for ensuring the Group upholds and promotes respect for human
rights. The Group seeks to anticipate, prevent and mitigate any potential negative human rights impacts as well as enhance positive impacts
through its policies and procedures and, in particular, through its policies regarding employment, equality and diversity, treating customers fairly
and information security. Group policies seek both to ensure that employees comply with the relevant legislation and regulations in place in
the UK and to promote good practice. The Group’s policies are formulated and kept up to date by the relevant business area, authorised by
the Board and communicated to all employees through the Human Resources Policies Manual.
The Group undertakes extensive monitoring of the implementation of all of its policies and has not been made aware of any incident in which
the organisation’s activities have resulted in an abuse of human rights.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
25
A6. Approval of strategic report
t
r
o
p
e
r
i
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S
.
A
Section A of this Annual Report comprises a strategic report for the Group which has been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and
in reliance upon, applicable English company law, in particular Chapter 4A of the Companies Act 2006, and the liabilities of the directors in
connection with this report shall be subject to the limitations and restrictions provided by such law.
It should be noted that the Strategic Report has been prepared for the Group as a whole, and therefore gives greater emphasis to those
matters which are signifi cant to the Company and its subsidiaries when viewed as a whole.
Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on behalf of the Board.
JOHN G GEMMELL
Company Secretary
26 November 2013
26
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
B. Corporate governance
B1
Board of directors
B2
Corporate governance
B2.1
Audit and Compliance Committee
B2.2
Nomination Committee
B3
Directors’ remuneration report
B3.1
Statement by the Chairman
B3.2
Policy report
B3.3
Annual report on remuneration
B4
Directors’ report
B5
Statement of directors’ responsibilities
28
30
34
36
38
38
39
51
69
72
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
B1. Board of directors
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Robert G Dench
Chairman
Age 63
Bob Dench joined the Group as a non-executive
director in September 2004 and was appointed
Chairman in February 2007. During an extended
career with Barclays he held a number of senior
positions in the UK and overseas, leaving in 2004.
He is also a non-executive director of AXA UK plc,
where he chairs the Audit Committee, and Chairman
of AXA Ireland Limited.
Nigel S Terrington
Chief Executive
Age 53
Nigel Terrington joined the Group in
1987 and became Chief Executive in
June 1995, having previously held the
positions of Treasurer and Finance
Director. Prior to joining the Group, he
worked in investment banking. He is
chairman of the Council of Mortgage
Lenders and is also a member of HM
Treasury’s Home Finance Forum. He has
previously held the positions of Chairman
of the Intermediary Mortgage Lenders
Association (‘IMLA’), Chairman of the
Finance and Leasing Association (‘FLA’)
Consumer Finance Division and a Board
member of the FLA. He is an associate of
the Chartered Institute of Bankers.
Nicholas Keen
Finance Director
Age 55
Nick Keen joined the Group in May 1991 and became Finance Director in
June 1995 having previously held the position of Treasurer. Prior to joining the
Group he worked in Corporate Banking, Treasury and Capital Markets. He is
Chairman of the Paragon Credit Committee.
Richard J Woodman
Director - Corporate Development
Age 48
Richard Woodman was appointed to the Board as Director
- Corporate Development in February 2012. He was also
appointed Managing Director of Idem Capital Limited.
He joined the Group in 1989 and he has held various
senior strategic and fi nancial roles, latterly as Director of
Business Analysis and Planning. More recently he has
taken a lead role in the Group’s strategic development
and, in particular, in the portfolio acquisition programme
through Idem Capital. He is a member of the Chartered
Institute of Management Accountants.
John A Heron
Managing Director – Paragon Mortgages
Age 54
John Heron joined the Group in January
1986. He was appointed as Marketing
Director in 1990 and in 1994 played a
pivotal role in re-establishing the Group’s
mortgage lending operations as Managing
Director of Paragon Mortgages. He joined
the Board in 2003 and is responsible for
the Group’s buy-to-let mortgage business.
He is a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of
Bankers, Chair of the CML buy-to-let panel
and a member of the IMLA board.
28
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Edward A Tilly
Non-executive director
Age 70
Ted Tilly was appointed as a non-executive
director on 1 April 2008. He was the senior
independent director of Retail Decisions PLC
from January 2000 until January 2007. He
has held a number of directorships including
Alan K Fletcher
Non-executive director
Chairman of Barclays Life Assurance
Age 63
Company Ltd from 1999 to 2003. Prior to this
Alan Fletcher was appointed as a non-executive director on
Mr Tilly was Chairman and Chief Executive of
25 February 2009. He has considerable experience in fi nancial
GE Capital’s European insurance division. He
services, including pension fund trusteeship and investment
was with the Legal & General Group for nearly
fund management. He was Chairman of Neville James
thirty years where he held a number of senior
Holdings prior to its acquisition by Challenger International of
positions including Director Life and Pensions
Australia, following which he was Sales and Marketing Director
and Director International. He is the Senior
of Challenger Group Services and a director of Challenger Life
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Independent Director.
(UK) from 2002 to 2003. He was Chairman of the professional
training company, Fresh Professional Development, from 2003
to 2010. He was a member of the General Synod of the Church
of England between 2007 and 2010. He has been a member
of the Church of England Pensions Board since 2009 and is
also a member of its Investment Committee and Chairman
of the Housing Committee. He is Chairman of the Paragon
Remuneration Committee.
Peter J N Hartill
Non-executive director
Age 64
Peter Hartill was appointed as a non-executive director
on 11 February 2011. A Chartered Accountant, he is
currently non-executive Chairman of Deeley Group and a
non-executive director of Scott Bader Limited. Previously,
he spent forty years with Deloitte, becoming a senior audit
partner and a business advisor with experience across a
wide range of industries and business issues. Specifi cally he
has considerable experience in acquisitions and disposals,
capital raising, risk control and corporate governance in the
fi nancial services sector. He is Chairman of the Paragon
Audit and Compliance Committee.
Fiona J Clutterbuck
Non-executive director
Age 55
Fiona Clutterbuck was appointed
as a non-executive director on
12 September 2012. She is currently
the Head of Strategy and Corporate
Development at the Phoenix Group
and
is also senior
independent
director of WS Atkins plc and brings
to the Board a substantial level
of corporate fi nance experience,
having previously held the positions
of Managing Director and Head
of Financial
Institutions Advisory
at ABN AMRO Investment Bank,
Managing Director and Global Co-
Head of Financial Institutions Group
at HSBC
Investment Bank and
Director at Hill Samuel Bank Limited.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
29
B2. Corporate governance
The Board of directors is committed to the principles of corporate governance contained in the UK Corporate Governance Code (‘Code’)
issued by the Financial Reporting Council in September 2012 and which is publicly available on their website at www.frc.org. Throughout the
year ended 30 September 2013 the Company complied with the provisions of the Code.
Leadership
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
The Board of directors is responsible for overall Group strategy, for approving major agreements, transactions and other fi nancing matters
and for monitoring the progress of the Group against budget. All directors receive suffi cient relevant information on fi nancial, business and
corporate issues prior to meetings and there is a formal schedule of matters reserved for decision by the Board, which includes material asset
acquisitions and disposals, granting and varying authority levels of the Chairman and the executive directors, determination and approval of
the Group’s objectives, strategy and annual budget, investment decisions, corporate governance policies and fi nancial and dividend policies.
During the year the Board of directors comprised the Chairman, four executive and four independent non-executive directors. All of the
directors bring to the Company a broad and valuable range of experience. The names of the directors in offi ce at the date of this report and
their biographical details are set out in section B1.
The division of responsibilities between the Chairman and Chief Executive is clearly established, set out in writing and agreed by the Board.
There is a strong non-executive representation on the Board, including Edward Tilly, the Senior Independent Director. This provides effective
balance and challenge.
The Chairman’s other business commitments are set out in the biographical details in section B1 and there have been no signifi cant changes
during the period to those commitments.
Prior to 1 October 2008 the Board approved a set of guiding principles on managing confl icts and agreed a process to identify and authorise
any confl icts which might arise. At each meeting of the Board actual or potential confl icts of interest in respect of any director are reviewed.
The Board also operates through a number of committees covering certain specifi c matters, these being:
Board committees
•
The Remuneration Committee, which during the year consisted of Alan Fletcher (who chairs the Committee), Fiona Clutterbuck,
Peter Hartill, and Edward Tilly, all of whom were independent non-executive directors, and the Chairman of the Company, Robert Dench.
•
The Audit and Compliance Committee, which during the year consisted of Peter Hartill (who chairs the Committee), Fiona Clutterbuck,
Alan Fletcher, and Edward Tilly, all of whom were independent non-executive directors. The Board is satisfi ed that all members of the
Committee have recent and relevant fi nancial experience. The Committee meets at least three times per year.
•
The Nomination Committee, consisting of Robert Dench, who chairs the Committee, Nigel Terrington and all of the non-executive directors,
ensuring that a majority of the Committee’s members are independent non-executive directors.
Executive committees
•
The Asset and Liability Committee, consisting of appropriate heads of functions and chaired by Nigel Terrington, the Chief Executive. The
Committee meets regularly and monitors Group liquidity risks, interest rate risks, currency risks and treasury counterparty exposures.
Further information on the Group’s fi nancial risk management procedures and the Committee’s part in them is given in note 6 to
the accounts.
•
The Credit Committee, consisting of appropriate heads of functions and chaired by Nicholas Keen, the Finance Director. It meets regularly
and is responsible for establishing credit policy and monitoring compliance therewith.
All Board committees operate within defi ned terms of reference and suffi cient resources are made available to them to undertake their duties.
The terms of reference of the Remuneration Committee, Audit and Compliance Committee and Nomination Committee are available on
request from the Company Secretary.
30
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The attendance of individual directors at the regular meetings of the Board and its committees in the year is set out below, with the number
each was eligible to attend shown in brackets
Director
Board
Audit and Compliance
Committee
Remuneration
Committee
Nomination
Committee
Robert G Dench
Nigel S Terrington
Nicholas Keen
John A Heron
Richard J Woodman
Edward A Tilly
Alan K Fletcher
Peter J N Hartill
Fiona Clutterbuck
9 (9)
9 (9)
9 (9)
9 (9)
9 (9)
8 (9)
9 (9)
9 (9)
7 (9)
-
-
-
-
-
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)
5 (5)
-
-
-
-
4 (5)
5 (5)
5 (5)
4 (5)
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
The work of the Board committees is described further in sections B2.1, B2.2 and B3.
Effectiveness
All of the non-executive directors are independent of management and all are appointed for fi xed terms. They are kept fully informed of
all relevant operational and strategic issues and bring a strongly independent and experienced judgement to bear on these issues. The
non-executive directors meet with the Chairman, from time to time, without the presence of the executive directors.
All of the directors were re-elected at the Annual General Meeting on 7 February 2013 and all of them have submitted themselves for re-election
at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.
All directors have access to the advice and services of the Company Secretary, who is responsible to the Board for ensuring that board
procedures are complied with. Both the appointment and removal of the Company Secretary are matters for the Board as a whole.
All directors are able to take independent professional advice in the furtherance of their duties whenever it is considered appropriate to do so
and have access to such continuing professional development opportunities as are identifi ed as appropriate in the Board appraisal process.
The composition of the Board and its committees is kept under review, with the aim of ensuring that there is an appropriate balance of power
and authority between executive and non-executive directors and that the directors collectively possess the skills and experience necessary
to direct the Company and the Group’s business activities.
There is an established process for external appointments through the Nomination Committee. Ultimately, the appointment of any new director
is a matter for the Board. Executive director appointments are based upon merit and business need. Non-executive appointments are based
upon the candidates’ profi les matching those drawn up by the Nomination Committee. In all cases the Board approves the appointment only
after careful consideration.
The Board, individual directors and Board committees are appraised annually.
During the year the Board conducted a formal and rigorous performance review, which was facilitated by Socia Limited, who have no other
connection with the Group. All Board members participated in a series of individual face to face interviews with the external facilitator, which
were followed by a Board discussion at its meeting in July 2013. The facilitator’s formal report stated that the review indicated that the
Company met the requirements of the Code.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
31
B2 Corporate governance continued
The non-executive directors meet to review the performance of the Chairman. The performance of the Chief Executive is appraised by the
Chairman. The performance of the other executive directors is appraised by the Chief Executive in conjunction with the Chairman. The results
of these appraisals are presented to the Remuneration Committee for consideration and determination of remuneration.
The Chairman appraises the performance of the non-executive directors, identifying any development opportunities or training needs.
Following her appointment to the Board in September 2012, Fiona Clutterbuck undertook a programme of activities to familiarise herself
with the operations of the Group. All of the non-executive directors have received presentations during the year on various aspects of the
Group’s activities.
At the Annual General Meeting the Chairman will confi rm to shareholders, when proposing the re-election of any non-executive director, that,
following formal performance evaluation, the individual’s performance continues to be effective and demonstrates commitment to the role. The
letters of appointment of the non-executive directors will be available for inspection at the Annual General Meeting.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Accountability
Detailed reviews of the performance of the Group’s main business lines are included within the Strategic report. The Board uses this to present
a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of the Company’s position and prospects.
The directors’ responsibility for the fi nancial statements is described in section B5.
An on-going process for identifying, evaluating and managing the signifi cant risks faced by the Group, which is regularly reviewed by the
Board, was in place for the year ended 30 September 2013 and to the date of these fi nancial statements. The directors confi rm that they have
reviewed the effectiveness of the Group’s system of internal control for this period and that these procedures accord with the guidance ‘Internal
Controls: Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code’.
The directors are responsible for the system of internal control throughout the Group, including the system of internal control over fi nancial
reporting, and for reviewing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business
objectives, and can provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance against the risk of material misstatement or loss and that assets are
safeguarded against unauthorised use or disposition. In assessing what constitutes reasonable assurance, the directors have regard to the
relationship between the cost and benefi ts from particular aspects of the control system.
The system of internal control includes documented procedures covering accounting, compliance, risk management, personnel matters
and operations, clear reporting lines, delegation of authority through a formal structure of mandates, a formalised budgeting, management
reporting and review process, the use of key performance indicators throughout the Group and regular meetings of the Asset and Liability and
Credit Committees and senior management.
Internal control over fi nancial reporting within the Group is provided by a process designed, under the supervision of the Finance Director and
senior fi nancial management of the Group, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of fi nancial reporting and the preparation of
fi nancial statements for external reporting purposes, including the process of preparing the Group’s consolidated fi nancial statements.
Internal control over fi nancial reporting includes policies and procedures intended to ensure that records are maintained that fairly, and in
reasonable detail, refl ect transactions and dispositions of assets, to provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary
to permit the preparation of the fi nancial statements, to ensure that receipts and expenditures are only being made in accordance with
management authorisation and to provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or
disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the fi nancial statements.
Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections
of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal controls may become inadequate because of changes
in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may reduce.
32
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The Board receives regular reports setting out key performance and risk indicators. In addition the Board operates a formal risk management
process, from which the key risks facing the business are identifi ed. The process results in reports to the Board on how these risks are being
managed. The Board has a programme of regular presentations from senior management to enable the Board to review the operation of
internal controls in relation to the risks associated with their specifi c areas.
The system of internal control is monitored by management and by an internal audit function that concentrates on the areas of greater risk and
reports its conclusions regularly to management and the Audit and Compliance Committee. The internal audit work plan is approved annually
by the Audit and Compliance Committee, which reviews the effectiveness of the system of internal control annually and reports its conclusions
to the Board. Further details of the role and activities of the Audit and Compliance Committee and its relationship with the internal and external
auditors are set out in section B2.1.
Remuneration
Information on how the Group has applied the provisions of the Corporate Governance Code relating to remuneration is set out in the Directors’
remuneration report in section B3.
Relations with shareholders
The Board encourages communication with the Company’s institutional and private investors. All shareholders have at least twenty working
days’ notice of the Annual General Meeting at which the directors and committee chairmen are available for questions. The Annual General
Meeting is held in London during business hours and provides an opportunity for directors to report to investors on the Group’s activities, to
answer their questions and receive their views. Shareholders have an opportunity to vote separately on each resolution and all proxy votes
lodged are counted and the balances for, against and directed to be withheld in respect of each resolution is announced.
The Chairman, Chief Executive and Finance Director have a full programme of meetings with institutional investors during the course of the
year and investors’ comments are communicated to all members of the Board, enabling them to develop an understanding of the major
shareholders’ views of the Group. During the year ended 30 September 2013 meetings were held with investors from the UK, Europe and
North America. From time to time other presentations are made to institutional investors and analysts to enable them to gain a greater
understanding of important aspects of the Group’s business.
The Chairman and the Chairman of the Remuneration Committee hold annual meetings with leading shareholders to discuss remuneration
policies and other corporate governance matters and the comments received are reported to the Board and considered by the Remuneration
Committee in determining or varying the Group’s approach to executive compensation.
The Company’s web site at www.paragon-group.co.uk provides access to information on the Company and its businesses.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
33
B2.1 Audit and Compliance Committee
The Audit and Compliance Committee comprises all of the independent non-executive directors of the Company and its terms of reference
include all matters indicated by Disclosure and Transparency Rule 7.1 and the UK Corporate Governance Code.
The Committee’s responsibilities include:
•
•
•
•
monitoring the integrity of the Group’s fi nancial reporting;
reviewing the Group’s internal control and risk management systems;
monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the Group’s internal audit function;
ensuring that the system and controls for regulatory compliance are effective; and
• monitoring the relationship between the Group and the external auditor.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
It also provides a forum through which the Group’s external and internal audit functions report to the non-executive directors.
Meetings
The Committee meets at least three times a year and has an agenda linked to events in the Group’s fi nancial calendar. The Committee normally
invites the Chairman, the executive directors, Director of Financial Accounting and Group Company Secretary, Director of Legal Services,
Head of Internal Audit and a partner and other representatives from the external auditor to attend meetings of the Committee, although it
reserves the right to request any of these individuals to withdraw.
For part of each meeting the Committee will meet separately with representatives of the external auditor and the Head of Internal Audit without
any other persons present.
At each meeting the Committee receives reports of reviews conducted throughout the Group by the Internal Audit and, from time to time,
compliance functions.
Signifi cant issues addressed by the Committee in relation to the fi nancial statements
The Committee considers whether the accounting policies adopted by the Group are suitable and whether signifi cant estimates and
judgements made by the management are appropriate. In evaluating the Group’s fi nancial statements for the year ended 30 September 2013
the Committee considered particularly:
•
•
•
•
The calculation of interest income under the Effective Interest Rate method for both internally originated and purchased loan assets;
The levels of impairment provision against loan assets;
The valuation of the defi cit in the Group’s defi ned benefi t pension scheme; and
The Group’s capital and funding position and the Group forecasts for future periods.
In each of these areas the Committee was provided with papers discussing the position shown in the accounts, the underlying market
conditions and assumptions and the methodology adopted for any calculations. These were reviewed in detail and discussed with the relevant
Group staff and the results of this work were considered, together with the results of testing by the external auditor.
The Committee also considered whether this Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy.
The Committee was able to reach satisfactory conclusions on all of these areas and therefore resolved to commend the Annual Report to the
Board for approval.
34
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
External auditor
The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness of the external audit process, for monitoring the independence and objectivity of
the external auditor and for making recommendations to the Board in relation to the appointment of external auditors. The Committee is also
responsible for developing and implementing the Group’s policy on the provision of non-audit services by the external auditor.
The Committee considers the effectiveness of the external audit and the Group’s relationship with the external auditor, Deloitte LLP, on an
on-going basis, and have conducted a formal review of the effectiveness of the annual audit before commending this Annual Report to the
Board. This review consisted of considering a list of relevant questions, together with the senior fi nancial management of the Group, without
the external auditor present, and then discussing the evaluation with the auditors. The Committee was able to conclude, on the basis of this
exercise and its experience over the year that the external audit process remained effective. A further review will be carried out following the
completion of audit procedures on all Group companies and reported on in next year’s annual report.
Deloitte LLP and its predecessor fi rms have been the auditors of the Group since its foundation in 1985, although the lead audit partner
rotates every fi ve years, most recently following the completion of the audit for the year ended 30 September 2011. Before recommending their
re-appointment to the Board, the Committee engaged with the auditors to ensure that they are still providing the required quality of service and
remained independent. During the year the external auditor presented the Committee with their fi rm’s transparency report, which is intended to
demonstrate the steps it takes to ensure audit quality with reference to the Audit Quality Framework issued by the Professional Oversight Board
of the Financial Reporting Council. More specifi cally the Committee considered whether the auditor’s understanding of the Group’s business,
their access to appropriate fi nancial services and regulatory specialists within their fi rm, both locally and nationally, and their understanding of
the sectors in which the Group operates were appropriate to the Group’s needs. It also assessed the performance of the audit, as described
above, the auditor’s conduct of their relationship with the Group and the requirements of the Group’s fi nancial control process. On this basis
the Committee concluded that the needs of the Group would not be best served by putting the external audit out to tender at this time. The
Committee has therefore recommended to the Board that the reappointment of Deloitte LLP should be proposed at the forthcoming Annual
General Meeting.
The Committee notes, however, the recent fi ndings of the Competition Commission into the audit market, which will require all FTSE-350
companies to put their audit out to tender every ten years, and, where auditors have been in offi ce since before 2005, to conduct a tender
no later than two years after the end of the current lead partner’s fi ve year term. That would mean that the Group would be required to put its
audit out to tender in or before its fi nancial year ending 30 September 2018. A recommended course of action will be proposed to the Board
during the next fi nancial year and the Committee will report on its conclusions in next year’s annual report. The Committee has not identifi ed
any factors which might restrict its choice of external auditor.
Both the Committee and the external auditor have in place safeguards to avoid any compromise of the independence and objectivity of
the external auditor. The Committee considers the independence of the external auditor annually and the Group has a formal policy for
the engagement of its external auditor to supply non-audit services. The policy is designed to ensure that neither the nature of the service
to be provided nor the level of reliance placed on the services could impact the objectivity of the external auditor’s opinion on the Group’s
fi nancial statements.
The policy precludes the appointment of the external auditor to provide any service where there is involvement in management functions
or decision making, or any service on which management may place primary reliance in determining the adequacy of internal controls,
fi nancial systems or fi nancial reporting. The external auditor may provide corporate fi nance and similar services (provided there is no signifi cant
advocacy role) or tax services but, if the advice given or the position taken would be material to the Group, the prior consent of the Committee
would be required. Internal audit services will not be provided by the external auditor. Other services may be procured by management without
the prior consent of the Committee, but are reported to the Committee on an ongoing basis.
Fees paid to the external auditor are shown in note 16 to the Accounts. Other than services required to be provided by external auditors by
legislation or regulation, non-audit services relate to taxation, corporate fi nance activity and the advisory work in connection with the Group’s
application for a banking licence (shown as ‘other services’ in note 16).
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
35
B2.1 Audit and Compliance Committee continued
In respect of taxation services the Committee has considered the services provided and concluded that the understanding of the Group and
the industry demonstrated by the advisers make them well placed to meet the Group’s needs. In respect of the corporate fi nance services,
the external auditor’s fi rm was selected to provide these services as they were considered to offer the most appropriate skills and experience
for the projects concerned in a cost-effective manner. In respect of the banking licence application, the external auditor’s fi rm was appointed
after a rigorous process to evaluate their appropriateness for the role, and only after some early work on the project had been placed with an
alternative supplier.
Overall the fees paid to the external auditor for non-audit services (excluding VAT), were £1,185,000, which is equivalent to 69% of the total
fees paid to them. However £260,000 relates to the banking application, which has now been submitted and a further £75,000 related to
projects undertaken in conjunction with third parties where the cost has been recovered from them. Excluding these items, non-audit fees
represent 62% of the total.
Other potential providers were considered and the use of the external auditor’s fi rm was approved by the Committee after having received
confi rmation from the auditor that they had taken specifi c steps to protect their independence in accordance with the Auditing Practices
Board’s Revised Ethical Standards for Auditors.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Internal audit
During the year the Committee has considered and approved the Group internal audit plan, which is based on an assessment of the key risks
faced by the Group. It has monitored progress of the internal audit function against that plan, ensuring that the internal audit function has
suffi cient resource to carry out its duties effectively.
Reports on internal audit work have been received by the Committee and, where necessary appropriate actions have been recommended to
the Board.
The results of this work, together with the Committee’s engagement with the management information of the Group and the executive
directors, has enabled them to conclude that the statements given in section B2 relating to the Group’s systems of internal control and its
management of risk are appropriate.
B2.2 Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee consists of the Chairman of the Company, Robert Dench, who chairs the Committee, Nigel Terrington and all of
the non-executive directors, ensuring that a majority of the Committee’s members are independent non-executive directors. The Committee
is convened as required to nominate candidates for membership of the Board, although ultimate responsibility for appointment rests with
the Board.
The Group recognises the importance of diversity, including gender diversity, at all levels of the organisation including the Board and the
contribution which it can make to Board effectiveness. The Group’s diversity policies are described in section A5.1 of the Annual Report,
where information on the composition of the workforce is also given. The Group recognises the importance of diversity on the Board, not
only of gender, but also of experience and background, and the valuable contribution which such diversity can make towards achieving the
appropriate balance of skills and knowledge which an effective board of directors requires.
36
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
There is a formal process for the appointment of directors, starting with a review of the Board structure, size and composition, leading to
the preparation of a written specifi cation of the skills required and the identifi cation of suitable candidates by the Committee. The choice
of appointee is based entirely on merit. The Committee ensures that prospective non-executive directors can devote suffi cient time to the
appointment. The Board recognises the benefi ts that can fl ow from non-executive directors holding other appointments but requires them to
seek the agreement of the Chairman before entering into any commitments that might affect the time they can devote to the Company.
The Committee only engages in the process of identifi cation of suitable candidates for appointment to the Board when requested by the Board
to do so and no meetings of the committee took place in the year.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
37
B3. Directors’ Remuneration Report
This report is on the activities of the Remuneration Committee for the year ended 30 September 2013 and sets out the remuneration policy
and remuneration details for the executive and non-executive directors of the Company. It has been prepared in accordance with Schedule 8 of
The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2008, as amended in August 2013,
and the principles of the UK Corporate Governance Code. This is the fi rst time that the Company has reported under these new regulations,
and we would welcome any feedback on the format and content of this report in order to assist us in determining what, if any, revisions should
be made to it in future years.
The report is split into three main areas: the Statement by the Chairman of the Committee (B3.1), the Policy Report (B3.2) and the Annual
Report on Remuneration (B3.3). The Policy Report will be subject to a binding shareholder vote at the Annual General Meeting to be held on
6 February 2014 and the policy will take effect on approval. The Annual Report on Remuneration provides details on remuneration in the period
and some other information required by the Regulations. It will be subject to an advisory shareholder vote at the Annual General Meeting.
The Companies Act 2006 requires the auditors to report to the shareholders on certain parts of the report and to state whether, in their opinion,
those parts of the report have been properly prepared in accordance with the Regulations. The parts of the Annual Report on Remuneration
that are subject to audit are indicated in that report. The Statement by the Chairman of the Remuneration Committee and the Policy Report
are not subject to audit.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
B3.1 Statement by the Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
The information provided in this part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report is not subject to audit.
Dear Shareholder
The philosophy underpinning the Group’s remuneration policy seeks to produce an outcome which is fair and appropriate to the Company,
its shareholders and its senior executives. Company performance is central, with the focus being on short and long term qualitative and
quantitative objectives. The Group has made excellent progress against the objectives set at the beginning of the fi nancial year: Operating
profi t has increased by 10.4% to £105.4 million, £359.8 million of fi rst mortgage loans were advanced, whilst maintaining high credit standards,
£92.8 million was invested in loan portfolios, two securitisations were completed on improving terms, warehouse funding facilities were
increased and extended, and the Group’s preparations to recommence consumer lending, which is likely to be through a bank subsidiary, were
signifi cantly progressed. The Committee has refl ected this performance in applying the remuneration policy.
Performance bonuses of 85.0% of maximum for Mr N S Terrington and Mr N Keen, 76.0% of maximum for Mr J A Heron and 92.5% of
maximum for Mr R J Woodman have been awarded. In reaching this determination, the Committee has reviewed performance against a
number of fi nancial and risk based targets, taking into account individual performance. Long term incentives (‘LTIs’) which were granted in
January 2010 matured in January 2013. These awards were subject to a Total Shareholder Return (‘TSR’) performance condition, measured
against the FTSE-250 Index over the three year period from the date of grant. The Company’s performance over the period ranked in the upper
quartile and therefore the awards vested in full. It is the judgement of the Committee that these rewards to executives are a fair refl ection of
performance over the period.
During the year the Committee considered all aspects of its policy on executive director remuneration. This concluded that, following the
alterations reported last year to the performance metrics used for awards of LTIs, the current policy remained appropriate and would apply
during the year and in future years. As a result of these alterations awards granted have a reduced weighting on relative TSR, whilst an Earnings
Per Share (‘EPS’) performance condition has been introduced. Otherwise, there have been no further changes to remuneration policy and
none are currently proposed.
The other key decisions made by the Committee during the year are as follows:
•
•
38
Salaries for 2014 have been increased by 2%, broadly in line with increases to other employees.
The previous Performance Share Plan expired in 2013 and a replacement plan was approved at the Annual General Meeting held on
7 February 2013, with awards of performance shares being granted under the replacement plan during the year.
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
•
Awards of performance shares with a market value of 200% of salary, vesting of half of which is subject to a relative TSR performance
condition measured against the constituents of the FTSE-250 index (excluding investment trusts) and vesting of half of which is subject to
an EPS performance condition measured against a retail price index related target, will be awarded shortly.
•
•
No awards will be granted under the Matching Share Plan in the coming fi nancial year.
The share ownership guideline for executive directors was increased from 100% to 200% of annual salary.
Together with the Group Chairman, I consulted with major shareholders prior to the Committee’s fi nalisation of the decisions above and
received broad support.
The most important challenge for the Committee will be to continue to ensure that the remuneration policy remains appropriately structured to
retain and motivate executive directors, whilst providing alignment with shareholders and, most importantly, directly linking to the achievement
of the Company’s strategy.
I commend this report to shareholders and ask you to support the resolutions to approve the Company’s forward looking Remuneration Policy
Report and the annual report on remuneration for the year ended 30 September 2013 at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
ALAN K FLETCHER
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
26 November 2013
B3.2 Policy report
The information provided in this part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report is not subject to audit.
Introduction
This part of the report sets out the directors’ remuneration policy to apply from the Annual General Meeting to be held on 6 February 2014
and which will be subject to a binding vote by shareholders during that meeting. The policy, once approved, will apply until the Annual General
Meeting in 2017, unless revised by a vote of shareholders ahead of that time.
Following a review of all aspects of the policy on executive directors’ remuneration policy during the year ended 30 September 2012 and the
resulting changes to the performance metrics used for subsequent awards of LTIs, no further changes of policy are proposed for the year
ending 30 September 2014.
In setting the remuneration policy for the executive directors, the Committee takes into account:
• The need to attract, retain and motivate high quality executive directors to fulfi l the Company’s strategy;
• The maintenance of a clear link between rewards and company performance;
• The objective of achieving an appropriate mix of fi xed and variable pay;
• The views of our investors and shareholder bodies;
• The requirement to comply with the UK Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’);
• The need to encourage management to adopt a level of risk which is in line with the risk appetite of the business as approved by the Board;
•
The need to ensure a long-term focus through the deferral of part of the annual bonus and the requirement for executive directors to
maintain a signifi cant level of investment in the Company’s shares;
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
39
B3.2 Policy report continued
• Pay and benefi t practice within the Group and within the sector; and
• Periodic peer group comparisons.
Contractual commitments already made to directors will continue to be honoured as part of this policy.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Remuneration policy for the Chairman and executive directors
The Company’s policy is to ensure that the executive directors are fairly rewarded for their individual performance, having regard to the
importance of retention and motivation. The performance measurement of the executive directors and the determination of their annual
remuneration packages are undertaken by the Committee. The Committee also sets the salary for the Chairman, taking account of his
performance and time commitment in the role.
In forming and reviewing remuneration policy the Committee has given full consideration to the Code and has complied with its provisions
relating to directors’ remuneration throughout the year. Moreover, the Committee has given due regard to the link between remuneration and
strategy, seeking to ensure that the remuneration structures in place do not encourage excessive risk or activities that are not in line with the
agreed strategy.
The remuneration packages of the individual directors are assessed after a review of their individual performances and an assessment of
comparable positions in the fi nancial sector and within a group of pan-sectoral comparators comprising a number of FTSE-250 companies
with market capitalisations similar to the Group’s, there now being no directly comparable fi nancial services businesses in the UK.
The Committee pays due regard to the levels of remuneration within the Group when determining the remuneration of executive directors and
other senior employees. It also seeks to ensure that the incentive structure for senior management does not raise environmental, social or
governance risks by inadvertently motivating irresponsible behaviour.
Key aspects of the remuneration policy for executive directors
The executive directors receive a combination of fi xed and performance-related elements of remuneration. Fixed remuneration consists of
salary, benefi ts in kind and pension scheme contributions (see under ‘Pension contributions’ below). Performance-related remuneration
consists of participation in the annual bonus plan, the award of shares under the PSP and invitations to participate in the award of shares under
the MSP from time to time. The performance-related elements of remuneration are intended to provide a signifi cant proportion of executive
directors’ potential total remuneration.
40
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Purpose and link
to strategy
Operation
Maximum opportunity
Performance conditions
Base salary
To provide a competitive,
fi xed cash component
that refl ects the scope of
individual responsibilities and
recognises sustained individual
performance in the role.
Remunerate fairly for individual
performance, having regard to
the importance of motivation.
Take into account remuneration
levels in the Group as a
whole, individual and business
performance and objective
research into comparable
companies.
None.
Salaries for the year ending
30 September 2014 are set
out in the Annual Report on
Remuneration.
Increases, if the Committee is
satisfi ed with the individual’s
performance will normally
broadly follow those awarded
for the rest of the organisation.
Changes in the scope or
responsibilities of a director’s
role may require an adjustment
to salary above the normal level
of increase.
To provide market levels of
benefi ts on a cost-effective
basis.
Benefi ts
Private health cover for the
executive and their family, life
insurance cover of up to four
times salary and company car
or cash alternative.
Other benefi ts may be offered
from time to time broadly in line
with market practice.
Private health care benefi ts are
provided through third party
providers and therefore the
cost to the company and the
value to the director may vary
from year to year
The maximum car allowance is
£12,000 per annum.
None.
It is intended the maximum
value of benefi ts offered will
remain broadly in line with
market practice.
Pension
None.
Maximum pension 2/3 of salary
at retirement or the value of
the annual cash alternative
calculated by the Company’s
actuary.
To provide competitive
post-retirement benefi ts.
1/37.5 of basic annual salary
for each year of eligible service.
A cash alternative is offered
in lieu of pension accrual,
equating to the approximate
cost to the Company of defi ned
benefi t provision, normally
reviewed every fi ve years.
For new external appointments
a cash allowance or company
pension contribution set at a
rate lower than that for existing
directors may be awarded.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
41
B3.2 Policy report continued
Purpose and link
to strategy
Operation
Maximum opportunity
Performance conditions
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
To incentivise executives to
achieve specifi c, predetermined
goals that drive delivery of
the Company’s operational
objectives over a one-year
period.
To reward individual
performance.
To encourage retention and
alignment with shareholders’
interests through a three-year
deferral of a proportion of
bonus, awarded in shares.
Annual bonus
Maximum bonus potential is
200% of salary.
For Target performance a
bonus of 100% of salary will
be awarded, with additional
amounts being awarded for
exceptional performance.
If a bonus is awarded the
minimum that could be paid is
8.25% of salary.
For performance below
threshold, no bonus is payable.
Each executive director’s
annual bonus is based on a
challenging mix of fi nancial,
strategic and risk-related
performance measures.
25% of amounts awarded
in excess of £50,000 are
deferred, to be satisfi ed
in shares (together with
the aggregate amount of
accrued dividend thereon), for
three years. Higher levels of
deferment may be required by
the Committee.
A clawback mechanism applies
to all participants in the event
of misconduct or a material
misstatement of the Group’s
accounts.
The annual bonus is
non-pensionable.
The performance targets are
set by the Committee at the
start of the year with input, as
appropriate, from the Chairman
and Chief Executive.
The bonus is calculated as
follows:
Performance against a range
of measures, with the majority
relating to fi nancial metrics
and the remainder refl ecting
risk-related measures;
Each element is then subject
to a scale factor that can
reduce or increase the bonus
(subject to the overall cap of
200% of salary) according to
performance against personal
and strategic objectives
relating to the three elements.
This determines the percentage
payout of the annual bonus,
which is capped at the
maximum opportunity of 200%
of salary.
Details of the performance
targets set for the year under
review and performance
against them are provided
in the Annual Report on
Remuneration.
42
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Purpose and link
to strategy
Operation
Maximum opportunity
Performance conditions
Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’)
Maximum award is 200% of
salary in any year.
To incentivise executives to
achieve enhanced returns for
shareholders.
To encourage long-term
retention of key executives.
To align the interests of
executives and shareholders.
An annual award of shares
subject to continued service
and performance conditions
over a three year performance
period.
The performance conditions
used are reviewed on an annual
basis to ensure they remain
appropriate.
Awards are structured as nil
cost options with a ten year life.
Executives are entitled to any
dividends which accrue over
the period on vested awards.
Matching Share Plan (‘MSP’)
Normal maximum permissible
award is 50% of salary after
tax.
Exceptional maximum
permissible award is 100% of
salary after tax.
To provide additional
incentive for executives to
achieve enhanced returns for
shareholders.
To encourage long-term
retention of key executives.
To encourage key executives to
hold personal investment in the
Company’s shares.
Key executives invited, from
time to time, to invest the after
tax equivalent of up to 25%
of salary. (50% in exceptional
circumstances).
At the end of a three year
performance period and
subject to the shares being
held and the satisfaction
of performance criteria
determined by the Committee,
participants receive a match for
shares on a two for one basis.
Awards are structured as nil
cost options with a ten year life.
The MSP expires in February
2016 and the last grant made
under this plan was in 2010.
Granted subject to a
combination of challenging
fi nancial (e.g. adjusted EPS)
and relative TSR targets, tested
over three years.
25% of the awards will vest
for threshold performance,
with full vesting taking place
for equalling or exceeding the
maximum performance target.
The Committee retains
the ability to amend the
performance conditions for
future grants to ensure that
such grants achieve the stated
purpose.
Granted subject to a
combination of challenging
fi nancial (e.g. adjusted EPS)
and relative TSR targets, tested
over three years.
25% of the awards will vest
for threshold performance,
with full vesting taking place
for equalling or exceeding the
maximum performance target.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
43
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
B3.2 Policy report continued
Purpose and link
to strategy
Operation
Maximum opportunity
Performance conditions
To provide all employees with
the opportunity to become
shareholders on similar terms.
Periodic invitations are made
to participate in the Company’s
Sharesave Plan.
HMRC monthly savings limits
apply.
None.
Sharesave share plan
A savings contract over three or
fi ve years with the funds used
on maturity either to purchase
shares by exercising options or
returned to the participant.
The option is granted at a
discount to the share price at
the time of grant of up to 20%.
The Plan provides tax benefi ts
in the UK subject to satisfying
certain HMRC requirements
and is operated on an ‘all
employee’ basis.
44
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Key aspects of the remuneration policy for the Chairman and non-executive directors
The Chairman receives a salary, a company car or cash alternative and is eligible for private health cover for himself and his family in the same
way as the executive directors. Non-executive directors are remunerated solely by fees. Neither the Chairman nor the non-executive directors
are eligible to participate in any of the Company’s incentive or pension schemes and they are not entitled to receive compensation for early
termination of their terms of engagement.
Benefi ts may also be provided to non-executive directors related to the performance of their duties (e.g. travel and hospitality).
Purpose and link
to strategy
Operation
Maximum opportunity
Performance conditions
To ensure that the Group
can attract and retain the
appropriate number and mix
of non-executive directors
with the correct experience to
provide balance, oversight and
challenge.
None.
Salary and fees
Non-executive director fees
are reviewed on a periodic
basis and are subject to the
Articles of Association. The
Chairman’s fee is set annually
by the Committee, whilst the
non-executive directors’ fees
are determined by the Board.
The Board will exercise
judgement in determining the
extent to which non-executive
directors fees are altered in line
with market practice, given the
requirement to procure and
retain the appropriate skills
and given the expected time
commitments.
Non executive directors are
paid an annual base fee with
additional fees for the roles of
Senior Independent Director
and chairman of the Board
Committees.
Salaries and fees for the year
ending 30 September 2014 are
set out in the Annual Report on
Remuneration.
Increases above those awarded
for the rest of the organisation
may be made to refl ect the
periodic nature of any review.
Changes in the scope,
responsibilities of a director’s
role, or the time commitment
required, may require an
adjustment to the level of their
fee.
The Articles of Association
of the Company contain a
maximum level of fees that
can be paid annually to non-
executive directors. This is
reviewed by the Board from
time to time.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Remuneration committee fl exibility, discretion and judgement
The Committee operates the variable incentive plans according to their respective rules and in accordance with HMRC rules where relevant.
To ensure the effi cient administration of these plans the Committee has certain operational powers. These include the determination of:
• The participants of the plans on an annual basis;
• The timing of grant of award and/or payment;
• The quantum of an award and/or a payment (within the limits set in the policy table above);
• The extent of vesting based on the assessment of performance;
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
45
B3.2 Policy report continued
• Adjustments required in certain circumstances (e.g. change of control, rights issues, corporate restructuring, events and special dividends);
• Good/bad leaver status for incentive plan purposes and the appropriate treatment chosen; and
• The annual performance measures weighting, and targets for the annual bonus plan, PSP and MSP from year to year.
If an event occurs which results in the annual bonus or LTI performance conditions and/or targets being deemed no longer appropriate
(i.e. a material acquisition or divestment) then the Committee will have the ability to adjust the measures and/or targets and alter weightings so
that the conditions are not materially less diffi cult to satisfy.
Illustrations of the application of the remuneration policy
The chart below illustrates the remuneration opportunity provided to each executive director at different levels of performance for the
coming year:
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
0
0
0
£
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
37%
37%
17%
34%
35%
35%
16%
32%
PSP
Bonus
Total fixed
36%
36%
100%
50%
27%
100%
53%
29%
36%
36%
17%
33%
17%
33%
100%
50%
27%
100%
50%
27%
Min
£652
Target
£1,317
Max
£2,424
Min
£552
Target
£1,050
Max
£1,880
Min
£352
Target
£706
Max
£1,296
Min
£353
Target
£707
Max
£1,297
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
46
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
In developing the above scenarios the following assumptions have been used:
Total fi xed pay is based on the latest salary, benefi ts and pension allowances (including both the accrual under the defi ned benefi t scheme
and the cash supplement), with the amounts being calculated on a basis consistent with those shown in the single total fi gure of remuneration
table for the year ended 30 September 2013.
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
Salary
£000
443
332
236
236
Benefi ts
£000
Pension
£000
Total fi xed
£000
14
18
11
12
195
202
105
105
652
552
352
353
Target is based on what each director would receive if performance was in line with targets. Annual bonuses pay out at 50% of the maximum
for on-target performance. At median performance PSP awards would vest at 25%.
Maximum is based on 100% of the annual bonus and 100% vesting of the PSP awards.
No share price appreciation has been included in the above analysis.
As Sharesave awards are provided on an all employee basis they have not been included in the above analysis.
Choice of performance measures and approach to target setting
The choice of the performance measures applicable to the annual bonus scheme refl ect the Committee’s belief that incentives should be
appropriately challenging and tied to the achievement of both forward and backward-looking fi nancial objectives, risk metrics and specifi c
individual objectives linked to the Company’s strategy.
The Committee reviews the measures each year and varies them as appropriate to refl ect the priorities for the business in the year ahead.
A sliding scale of targets is set for each measure to encourage continuous improvement and challenge the delivery of above-target performance.
The PSP and MSP are subject to a combination of relative TSR and EPS growth measures. EPS is considered appropriate as the activities
of the Company in developing its new lending and other income streams should result in improvements to profi tability and including a profi t
measure such as EPS will be refl ective of long term performance. It also provides a balance to relative TSR, which considers shareholder value
creation and is a measure of market expectations of future performance.
The use of relative TSR and EPS growth in the LTIs provides a combined focus on the Group’s fi nancial performance and shareholder value
creation. Targets for EPS are set by reference to internal budgeting plans and external market expectations. TSR targets are set on a standard
practice, median to upper quartile ranking range. Only 25% of the award is payable for threshold levels of performance.
Policy on recruitment and promotion
Salaries for newly recruited directors will be set to refl ect their skills and experience, the Company’s intended pay positioning and the market
rate for the role. If it is considered appropriate to appoint a new director on a below market salary (for example, to allow the director to gain
experience in the role) the individual’s salary may be increased to a market level by way of a series of above infl ation increases over two to three
years, subject to their performance and development in the role.
A new appointment would be offered benefi ts comparable to existing directors, as well as other reasonable expenses such as legal, tax
equalisation and relocation costs (if necessary on a net of tax basis).
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
47
B3.2 Policy report continued
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
A new external appointment might be invited to participate in the defi ned benefi t scheme on the same terms as those offered to existing
directors. Alternatively a cash supplement may be offered to new appointments.
The prevailing maximum bonus opportunity for existing directors will not be exceeded for any newly recruited director and would be pro-rated
to refl ect the proportion of the year worked. It may be necessary to set different performance measures and targets initially, dependent on the
timing of the appointment and the nature of the role taken up. Guaranteed bonuses will not be offered.
LTI awards will be granted in line with the policy outlined for existing directors, with the same maximum opportunity for any newly recruited
director. Awards may be granted shortly after an appointment (subject to the Company not being in a prohibited period).
Current entitlements (for example, bonus and share awards) which will lapse on the executive’s departure from a previous position may be
replaced with awards that have no shorter time horizons, are subject to performance conditions (if replacing awards subject to performance
conditions) and do not have a higher theoretical fair value. The Committee retains fl exibility to do so on such basis as it deems appropriate in
the circumstances.
In the event that an existing employee is promoted to the Board, any contractual commitments made to the employee prior to such promotion
will continue to be honoured even if they would not otherwise be consistent with the policy prevailing when the commitment is fulfi lled.
Current service contracts and terms of engagement
The Chairman and executive directors hold one year rolling contracts in line with current market practice and the Committee reviews the terms
of these contracts regularly.
The current contracts are dated as follows:
R G Dench
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
-
-
-
-
-
8 February 2007
1 September 1990 (amended 16 February 1993, 30 October 2001 and 10 March 2010)
6 February 1996 (amended 30 October 2001 and 10 March 2010)
1 September 1990 (amended 14 January, 8 February 1993 and 10 March 2010)
8 February 1996 (amended 10 March 2010)
In the event of early termination, the directors’ contracts provide for the payment of one year’s salary, benefi ts, pension and bonus in lieu of
notice at the Company’s option, payable on termination. No provision exists for additional compensation in the event of termination due to
a change of control of the Company. These arrangements will continue to be honoured as they are contractual obligations of the Company.
All new executive directors externally appointed in future will have service contracts that are terminable by the Company on a maximum of
twelve months’ notice, subject to a payment of salary, benefi ts and pension. Provisions will be included in each new contract permitting the
Company to make any termination payments by instalments, and requiring directors to mitigate their loss in such circumstances.
Of the directors seeking re-election at the Annual General Meeting, Mr Dench, Mr Terrington, Mr Keen, Mr Heron and Mr Woodman each has
a service contract with the Company.
Executive directors may accept an external non-executive appointment with the approval of the Board. Any fees earned are retained by the
executive. None of the executive directors currently earns remuneration from external non-executive appointments.
48
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Current terms of engagement for the non-executive directors apply for the following periods:
E A Tilly
A K Fletcher
P J N Hartill
F J Clutterbuck
-
-
-
-
1 April 2011 to 1 April 2014
25 February 2012 to 25 February 2015
11 February 2011 to 11 February 2014
12 September 2012 to 12 September 2015
Non-executive director appointments are for three years unless terminated earlier by, and at the discretion of, the director or the Company
upon three months’ notice.
Policy on termination payments
The provisions of the executive directors’ service contracts (as noted above) will determine their entitlement to salary, benefi ts, pension and
bonus as compensation for loss of offi ce. Specifi c change of control provisions or entitlements to enhanced redundancy payments would
be excluded.
Any statutory entitlements or sums to settle or compromise claims in connection with the termination would be paid as necessary. In specifi c
circumstances, outplacement services and relocation expenses may be provided at normal market rates for directors.
For current executive directors, any entitlement to a bonus on termination would be based on an assessment of the performance over
the period.
For a new appointment, bonuses are normally only payable where the individual remains employed and is not under notice at the payment
date. However, in certain good leaver situations (injury or disability, redundancy, employment transferred outside the Group, or any other reason
the Committee decides) a bonus may be payable at the Committee’s discretion, based on an assessment of the performance of the individual
and the Company over the period of the bonus year worked.
The treatment of share based incentive awards will be determined by the Committee based on the relevant rules of the plan.
The default treatment for outstanding unvested PSP awards will be that they lapse on cessation of employment. In certain circumstances the
Committee may determine a good leaver status, whereby an award shall continue on its original terms, until the normal vesting date unless
the Committee decides it shall vest on the date of cessation subject to time pro-rating and assessment of the performance conditions. The
Committee may disapply time pro-rating if it considers the reduction is inappropriate. If a participant dies before the normal vesting date the
Committee may allow early vesting of the award, unless it considers it appropriate to continue to the normal vesting date. Awards are subject
to time pro-rating and assessment of the performance conditions unless the Committee considers the reduction by time pro-rating to be
inappropriate, whereby it can be disapplied.
The default treatment for outstanding unvested MSP awards will be that they lapse on cessation of employment. In certain circumstances the
Committee may determine a good leaver status, whereby an award shall continue on its original terms, until the normal vesting date unless
the Committee decides it shall vest on the date of cessation subject to time pro-rating and assessment of the performance conditions. The
Committee may disapply time pro-rating if it considers the reduction is inappropriate. If a participant dies before the normal vesting date the
award shall vest in full on the date of cessation.
For awards granted under the deferred share bonus plan, good leaver status would result in awards vesting on the date of cessation unless
the Committee determines they should continue to the normal vesting date.
On determination of a good leaver status or as the result of a death, then awards under all plans may be exercised within twelve months of
the date of vesting.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
49
B3.2 Policy report continued
Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
Directors and senior executives participate in the annual bonus scheme, which is designed to incentivise executives to achieve specifi c,
predetermined goals, reward individual performance and encourage retention through deferral of a proportion of the bonus. All members of
staff whose performance has been exceptional are eligible for a discretionary bonus.
Directors and senior staff are eligible to participate in the PSP and the MSP, although no awards have been made under the MSP since January
2010 and the Remuneration Committee has no current intention of making any further grants during the current fi nancial year or, other than
in exceptional circumstances, before the expiry of the MSP in 2016. The two plans are in place to encourage the long-term retention of key
executives who are considered to have the potential to infl uence shareholder value creation and awards are not offered to the wider staff.
Staff below director and head of function level are eligible to participate in the Group’s profi t related pay scheme, which pays out a fl at sum to
all eligible staff based on a percentage of the Group’s profi ts.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
The Group’s pension arrangements provide for a pension of 1/37.5 of basic annual salary (to a maximum of 2/3 for every year of eligible service)
for directors and certain senior executives, whereas the accrual rate for other members of staff who are members of the Paragon Pension
Plan is 1/60. The Plan was closed to new entrants in 2002 and participation in a stakeholder defi ned contribution scheme was offered to new
employees from that date.
In determining pay levels for the employees as a whole, the Group annually considers externally provided benchmark levels for comparable
jobs as well as individual development and performance. The general level of increase resulting from this review informs the Committee’s
deliberations on appropriate pay levels for the executive directors, together with external data specifi c to their roles which is used to ensure
that the levels of remuneration are appropriate.
The Committee does not formally consult employees on executive remuneration. However, they have the opportunity to make comments on
any aspect of the Company’s activities through employee forums and surveys and their comments are considered by the Committee.
Consideration of shareholders’ views
The Committee considers shareholder feedback received in relation to the AGM each year at a meeting shortly following the AGM. This
feedback, plus any additional feedback received during any meetings from time to time, is then considered as part of the Company’s annual
review of remuneration policy.
In addition, the Chairman of the Committee and the Chairman of the Company regularly engage directly with major shareholders and their
representative bodies and report their views back to the Committee, who take them into account when formulating any material changes to
the remuneration policy.
Details of votes cast for and against the resolution to approve last year’s remuneration report and any matters discussed with shareholders
during the year are set out in the Annual Report on Remuneration.
Legacy arrangements
For the avoidance of doubt, in approving this Policy Report, authority is given to the Company to honour any commitments entered into with
current or former directors (such as the payment of pension or the unwinding of legacy share schemes) that have or will have been disclosed
to shareholders in remuneration reports before the Policy takes effect. Details of any payments to former directors will be set out in the Annual
Report on Remuneration as they arise.
50
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration
B3.3.1 Application of policy
The information provided in this part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report is not subject to audit
Consideration by directors of matters relating to directors’ remuneration
Remuneration Committee
During the year, the Committee consisted of Alan Fletcher (who chaired the Committee), Fiona Clutterbuck, Peter Hartill and Edward Tilly, all
of whom were independent non-executive directors, and the Chairman of the Company, Robert Dench.
None of the non-executive directors who sit on the Committee has any personal fi nancial interest (other than as a shareholder), confl ict of
interest arising from cross-directorships or day-to-day involvement in running the business. The Chairman of the Company does not participate
in discussions on his own remuneration.
The Committee determines the Company’s policy on executive remuneration and specifi c compensation packages for each of the executive
directors and the Chairman. No director contributes to any discussion about his own remuneration. The Committee also reviews the level and
structure of remuneration of senior management.
The terms of reference of the Committee are available on request from the Company Secretary.
In determining the directors’ remuneration for the year, the Committee consulted Mr N S Terrington (Chief Executive) about its proposals.
The Committee has appointed New Bridge Street (‘NBS’), a brand of AON plc, as its independent advisor on remuneration matters and
retained their services throughout the year. NBS is a member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and has signed up to its Code of
Conduct. NBS also advised the Company on various sundry remuneration matters during the year, which did not confl ict with its advice to the
Committee. In evaluating the independence of NBS the Committee considered the following:
• other services provided to the Company and the fees paid by it to the advisor’s wider group, Aon Hewitt;
•
•
fees paid to NBS as a percentage of their wider group’s total revenues in the year;
the policy of NBS to prevent confl icts of interest;
• whether there were any relationships between NBS and any member of the Committee;
• whether there were any shares in the Company owned by the NBS or their wider group; and
• any business or personal relationships between the NBS or their wider group and any senior executive of the Company.
Aon Hewitt provided administration services to the corporate Trustee of the Group Retirement Benefi ts Plan during the year but given the
independence of the Trustee this is not considered to be advice to the Board.
NBS have written to the Committee Chairman to confi rm their position on these matters. Its total fees for the year ended 30 September 2013
were £109,000 (2012: £98,000), which were charged on the basis of the work carried out by them.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
51
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
Application of remuneration policy for the year ending 30 September 2014
Salary
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
The Chairman’s fees and executive directors’ salaries are determined by the Committee at the beginning of each year. In deciding appropriate
levels, the Committee considers remuneration levels within the Group as a whole, individual and business performance during the year and in
the past has relied on periodic objective research which gives up-to-date information on comparable FTSE-250 companies.
In view of the progress made by the Group during the year, the Committee has agreed that the Chairman’s fee and executive directors’ salaries
will be increased by 2.0% from 1 October 2013. This is in line with increases for the Group’s wider workforce.
The current salaries of the Chairman and the executive directors with effect from 1 October 2013 are as follows:
• R G Dench
• N S Terrington
• N Keen
• J A Heron
• R J Woodman
£207,000
£443,450
£332,000
£236,400
£236,400
The non-executive directors’ fees have remained unchanged since 1 October 2012 and are as follows:
• Base fee
£45,000
• Additional fee for Senior Independent Director
£15,000
• Additional fee for chairmen of committees
£15,000
The additional fee for chairmen of committees is currently payable to the Chairmen of the Remuneration and Audit and Compliance Committees,
but would be payable for the chairmanship of such additional Committees as should be authorised by the Board.
The total fees payable to non-executive directors are restricted to £250,000 by the Company’s Articles of Association. During the year the
Board reviewed this level and concluded that it may not be adequate to meet the Company’s future needs. Accordingly a resolution to increase
this limit to £400,000 will be proposed at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.
In addition to fees earned as a non-executive director, Mr A K Fletcher serves as a director of the Trustee board of the Paragon Pension
Plan and receives £10,000 per annum in respect of that appointment from Paragon Finance plc, the sponsoring company of the Plan and a
subsidiary of the Company.
Pension contributions
The executive directors are members of the Group Retirement Benefi ts Plan (the ‘Plan’), to which the Company contributes at the same rate
as for all members. Dependants of executive directors who are members of the Plan are eligible for a dependant’s pension and the payment of
a lump sum in the event of death in service. The pension arrangements provide for a pension of 1/37.5 of basic annual salary (to a maximum
of 2/3) for every year of eligible service. Where pension contributions are capped, additional payments are made to enable further provision.
As described below the executive directors have each ceased pension accrual in return for a cash supplement calculated to equate to the
cost of the Company’s contributions towards future service benefi ts had each individual stayed within the Plan for his future service accrual.
There are no unfunded promises or similar arrangements for directors.
52
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Benefi ts
Executives are entitled to family cover private medical health cover, life insurance cover of up to four times their salary and a car allowance of
up to £12,000 per annum.
Performance bonuses
The purpose of the bonus is to provide a meaningful cash incentive focused on improving the performance of the Company through the
achievement of a number of predetermined objectives. The annual bonus is non-pensionable.
The bonus payable to executive directors under the bonus scheme is capped at 200% of salary. A target level of 100% of salary is awarded for
delivery of the base business plan and agreed objectives, with achievement of the planned profi t level forming a major element.
For the year ending 30 September 2014, the annual bonus will be based on performance against the following performance measures:
(1) operational profi t, (2) future value of new business and (3) risk, each with equal weightings together with each director’s performance against
strategic and personal objectives, which will determine the level of a scale factor of between 0.5 and 1.5 times.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
The Committee has chosen not to disclose, in advance, the performance targets for the forthcoming year as these are felt to be commercially
sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be set out in next year’s Annual Report on Remuneration
except to the extent that any measure/target remains commercially sensitive.
25% of amounts awarded in excess of £50,000 are deferred, to be payable in shares (together with the aggregate amount of accrued dividend
thereon), after three years, net of any clawback applied (see below). The Committee may require higher levels of deferment.
A clawback mechanism applies to all participants in the event of misconduct or a material misstatement of the Group’s accounts.
Share awards
Executive directors are eligible for awards under the PSP and are entitled to participate in the Paragon UK Sharesave Plan 2009, on the same
terms as other employees.
Paragon Performance Share Plan (‘PSP’)
The PSP has an annual award limit to an individual of shares worth 200% of salary. Awards over shares with a market value of 200% of salary
will be granted to the executive directors in the year to 30 September 2014.
50% of awards are subject to the TSR test and 50% are subject to an EPS test.
The TSR test compares the rank of the Company’s TSR against a comparator group of companies comprising the constituents of the
FTSE-250 Index, excluding investment trusts, on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant. 25% of awards
vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance. The FTSE-250 has been chosen
because it is a broad-based index and because of the lack of comparable listed fi nancial services organisations at the current time. The
Committee believes that TSR usefully aligns the long-term performance conditions with the best interests of the shareholders.
The EPS test provides that 25% of EPS tested awards will vest where EPS growth is equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 3%,
increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for EPS growth equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 7% or more. In addition, prior
to any awards vesting, the Committee must be satisfi ed that the requirements of a fi nancial underpin test have been met.
Paragon Matching Share Plan (‘MSP’)
The Committee does not intend to grant any awards in the year ending 30 September 2014.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
53
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
B3.3.2 Directors’ remuneration for the year ended 30 September 2013
The information provided in this section has been audited
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Single total fi gure of remuneration for each director
The following tables have been prepared using the measures prescribed by The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups
(Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013.
In accordance with the Regulations, the amounts shown in respect of pension accrual have been calculated by applying a factor of 20 to the
increase in accrued pension, after adjusting for infl ation, whilst the values shown for share awards vesting in the year have been calculated
on the basis of the share price at the vesting date, which may not necessarily equate to the price at which the awards have been or may
be exercised.
Year ended 30 September 2013
Fixed remuneration
Variable remuneration
Total
Salaries Allowances
Pension
and allowance
and
fees
benefi ts
Pension
accrual
Cash
bonus
Deferred
Dividend
bonus on vested
deferred
bonus
Share
awards
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Chairman
R G Dench
Executive directors
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
Non-executive directors
E A Tilly
A K Fletcher
P J N Hartill
F J Clutterbuck
203
435
325
232
232
60
60
60
45
12
14
18
11
12
-
-
-
-
-
165
198
88
103
-
-
-
-
-
27
-
15
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
567
427
277
314
-
-
-
-
172
126
75
115
-
-
-
-
-
7
5
3
4
-
-
-
-
-
215
1,268
949
675
641
-
-
-
-
2,655
2,048
1,376
1,421
60
60
60
45
Total
1,652
67
554
42
1,585
488
19
3,533
7,940
54
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Year ended 30 September 2012
Fixed remuneration
Variable remuneration
Total
Salaries Allowances
Pension
and allowance
and
fees
benefi ts
Pension
accrual
Cash
bonus
Deferred
bonus
Share
awards
Dividend
on vested
deferred
bonus
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
£000
Chairman
R G Dench
Executive directors
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
Non-executive directors
E A Tilly
A K Fletcher
P J N Hartill
F J Clutterbuck
197
422
316
225
149
47
50
50
2
12
14
19
11
8
-
-
-
-
-
150
192
78
61
-
-
-
-
Total
1,458
64
481
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
566
427
223
322
-
-
-
-
172
126
58
128
-
-
-
-
1,538
484
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
209
1,241
929
662
567
-
-
-
-
2,565
2,009
1,257
1,235
47
50
50
2
3,399
7,424
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Mr R J Woodman was appointed on 9 February 2012 and Ms F J Clutterbuck was appointed on 12 September 2012.
Allowances and benefi ts includes benefi ts in kind, comprising private health cover, fuel benefi t, life assurance and company car provision.
The company car allowance paid to executive directors (£10,000 - £12,000) is also included in allowances and benefi ts.
Dividend is the accrued dividend paid on deferred bonuses which vested during the year.
Remuneration in respect of share awards is calculated by multiplying the number of shares vesting during the year by the mid-market closing
price of the shares on the vesting date.
The link between pay and performance - Annual bonus for the year ended 30 September 2013
The annual bonus for the year under review was based on performance against fi nancial and risk measures; performance against each of these
measures is then subject to individual scale factors according to performance against personal strategic objectives. The performance for the
year, and the resulting accrual levels, were as follows:
Measure
Weighting
Outcome
Financial
performance
Adjusted operating profi t
33.33%
£104.1m
Future value of
new business
Projected profi ts from lending activities transacted in the year
and projected residual cashfl ow from acquired portfolios
33.33%
BTL lending £359.8m
Idem investments £92.8m
The business having operated within the key risk tolerance
levels agreed by the Board
33.33%
See below
Award
level*
18%
30%
28%
100%*
Bonus achieved for 2013
76%*
Risk
Totals
*Of maximum under scheme, subject to individual performance scale factors of 0.5 to 1.5 times.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
55
B3.3
Annual report on remuneration continued
Financial performance
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Operating profi t for the year has exceeded the targeted level of £102.0 million and cash generation from the originated and acquired
portfolios was at strong levels. Firm control was maintained over costs, despite the costs associated with the banking licence
application and the impact of the increased share price on share based costs.
Future value
Buy-to-let lending volumes were, at £359.8 million, well in excess of the target, with margins broadly in line with target. In
addition to the buy-to-let volumes completed, the business ended the fi nancial year with a strong pipeline of £231.9 million for
future completions.
Acquisitions by Idem Capital, the Group’s investment subsidiary, at £92.8 million, were also well in excess of target, placing
Idem Capital at the core of the market. The business is also widening its franchise on the back of deals completed to date.
Risk
The Group has operated within the risk tolerance levels approved by the Board in respect of capital ratios, liquidity positions, the
risk appetite of new business, the management of operational risk, the development of plans to mitigate longer-term strategic risk,
and the management of regulatory risk. During the year complaint levels have been minimal, arrears levels remain low by industry
averages, funding sources have been further diversifi ed, liquidity has been strong and comfortably in excess of policy limits and
capital ratios are highly prudent.
Target business volume fi gures are not disclosed for the year because the Committee believes that disclosure of targeted margins, arrears
levels, volumes, cash plans and funding assumptions would provide competitors with information which would put the future of the business
at risk. Accordingly the Committee considers that such information is commercially sensitive.
The fi nal level of each executive director’s bonus is adjusted to refl ect personal performance against strategic objectives related to each of the
elements. These individual performance scale factors are between 0.5 and 1.5 times, according to performance. The objectives for the year
ended 30 September 2013 were as follows:
N S Terrington and N Keen
Working within the parameters of the Group’s risk appetite, to deliver the planned fi nancial performance for the year, whilst ensuring future profi t
streams and strategic delivery position the Group to meet its longer term goals.
J A Heron
The Committee, with advice from the Chief Executive, assessed the performance of the director with reference to the following objectives:
•
First Mortgage business to:
- Achieve target operating profi t
- Achieve target new lending volumes
-
Improve application conversion rates
Oversee bank authorisation project
Manage resource levels to meet immediate and longer-term strategic requirements
•
•
56
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
R J Woodman
The Committee, with advice from the Chief Executive, assessed the performance of the director with reference to the following objectives:
•
Idem division to:
- Achieve target operating profi t
- Achieve target return rate
- Raise profi le and investor/market awareness of Idem Capital
- Develop and embed operational and migration capacity along with governance, compliance and reporting capabilities
•
•
•
Maintain and lead corporate merger and acquisition activities
Effectively manage the Business Analysis and Planning division
Provide support to the project to establish a banking subsidiary
Performance against the objectives is assessed by the Committee at the end of the year (with input from the Chief Executive as appropriate).
Each objective is scored from 0 to 4, with target scale factor being for a score of 2, equating to a scale factor of 1.0 times, as set out in the
table below:
Scale factor
Average score
0.50
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
0
1
2
3
4
Performance
Poor
Below target
Target
Above target
Exceptionally good
The Committee, having considered individual performance against the objectives set at the beginning of the year, has agreed the following
scale factors for the year ended 30 September 2013:
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
1.12
1.12
1.00
1.22
The resulting bonuses for 2013, after applying the scale factors to the award levels, were as follows:
Executive
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
Financial
performance
Future
value
of new
business
Risk
Total
Scale
factor (percentage
of max
capped at
Total
Cash
Share
value
(max 33%) (max 33%) (max 33%)
times
100%)
£000
£000
£000
18%
18%
18%
18%
30%
30%
30%
30%
28%
28%
28%
28%
1.12
1.12
1.00
1.22
85.0%
85.0%
76.0%
92.5%
739
553
352
429
567
427
277
314
172
126
75
115
The maximum bonus entitlement is 200% of salary.
25% of amounts awarded in excess of £50,000 are deferred, to be payable in shares after three years, net of any clawback applied (see below).
For Mr Woodman, this policy applies to his bonus up to and including 150% of his salary, with the amount in excess of 150% being subject to
50% deferral. No further performance conditions apply to the deferred shares.
A clawback mechanism applies to all participants in the event of misconduct or a material misstatement of the Group’s accounts.
The Committee is satisfi ed that the level of bonus earned by each director refl ects both the performance of the individual and the Group during
the year.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
57
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
Directors’ pensions
The total amount charged to the profi t and loss account of the Group in respect of pension provision for directors was £555,000
(2012: £480,000).
Mr N S Terrington, Mr N Keen, Mr J A Heron and Mr R J Woodman were members of the Group defi ned benefi t pension plan during the year.
The amounts shown below describe their entitlement in accordance with paragraph LR 9.8.8(12) of the Listing Rules.
Normal
Increase / (decrease)
Transfer value
Retirement
in accrued pension
of increase /
date
during year
(decrease) less
excluding any
directors’
increase for infl ation
contributions
£000
£000
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
13/12/2019
13/01/2018
04/01/2019
10/05/2025
1
-
-
-
14
-
7
-
Accumulated
total accrued
pension at
30 September
2013
£000
167
97
94
58
Accumulated
total accrued
pension at
30 September
2012
£000
162
94
92
56
The pension entitlement shown is that which would be paid annually on retirement based on service to the following dates on which the
director elected to suspend future benefi t accrual within the plan: Messrs Terrington and Heron, 6 April 2006; Mr Woodman, 9 October 2007;
and Mr Keen, 1 April 2011.
The pension entitlements for Messrs Terrington and Heron continue to be linked to pensionable salaries, while Messrs Keen and Woodman
elected on 1 April 2011 that their benefi ts would no longer be linked to pensionable salaries and their accrued pension fi gures have, therefore,
been calculated based on a date of leaving of 1 April 2011 with deferred pension revaluation, where relevant.
The increase in accrued pension during the year (and transfer value of the increase) excludes any increase for RPI infl ation which is used for
applying deferred pension revaluation (which is capped at 5.0% per annum over the whole period of revaluation if relevant). The increase in RPI
infl ation used to calculate the accrued pensions as at 30 September 2012, for those members who elected to remove the link to increases
in pensionable salary from 1 April 2011 was capped at 5% for consistency with the deferred revaluation applied to the accrued pension over
a one year period to 2012. This year, the deferred revaluation applying over the two year period to 2013 is not capped, (as RPI infl ation has
been less than 5% per anum on average) and therefore the increase in accrued pension over the year includes the ‘catch-up’ from the capping
applied last year. As such the accrued pension has increased by more than the one year increase in RPI infl ation, however the increase in
accrued pension net of any increase for infl ation is shown as nil. This is consistent with the treatment in the previous year.
The transfer values have been calculated in accordance with the Occupational Pensions Schemes (Transfer Values) Regulations 1996 and the
Occupational Pensions Schemes (Transfer Values) (Amendment) Regulations 2008, in force from 1 October 2008.
Members of the plan have the option to pay Additional Voluntary Contributions; neither the contributions nor the resulting benefi ts are included
in the above table.
The transfer values disclosed above do not represent a sum either paid or currently payable to the individual director by the Group or the
scheme. Instead they represent a potential liability of the pension scheme should the director request a transfer, calculated at the balance
sheet date.
58
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The pension accrual fi gure included in the single total fi gure of remuneration table represents the increase in the accrued pension, excluding the
effect of CPI infl ation, during the year multiplied by 20, in accordance with the methodology set out in the Regulations. The increase in accrued
pension excluding infl ation in the table above, being as it is calculated using the RPI based methodology described, is not directly comparable.
During the year the Group made contributions in respect of further pension provision of £165,000 (2012: £150,000) for Mr Terrington,
£198,000 (2012: £192,000) for Mr Keen, £88,000 (2012: £78,000) for Mr Heron and £103,000 for Mr Woodman (2012: £61,000 following his
appointment) and these amounts are shown as ‘pension allowance’ in the single total fi gure of remuneration table.
Details of share-based awards
Awards granted in January 2010 under the Group’s LTIs (the PSP and MSP) which vested during the year were subject to performance
conditions measured over three fi nancial years, comparing the Group’s relative TSR performance against a comparator group of
companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant. The
vesting percentage was then reviewed by the Committee against a fi nancial underpin. The Company was ranked above the upper quartile
position, giving a 100% vesting percentage and the Committee determined that such level of vesting was consistent with the Company’s
fi nancial performance.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
59
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
Paragon Performance Share Plan
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Awards under this plan comprise a right to acquire shares in the Company for nil or nominal payment and will vest on the third anniversary of
their grant to the extent that the applicable performance criteria have been satisfi ed.
The awards granted during the year were calculated so as to have a face value of 200% of salary, using the average closing mid-market price
of the Company’s shares on each of the fi ve dealing days up to and including the day before the grant date. Therefore the face value of the
awards granted during the year (being the number of shares in each case multiplied by £3.1192, that being the average of the closing prices
of the Company’s shares at the end of each of the fi ve dealing days ending on the day before the grant date) were £869,500 for Mr Terrington,
£651,000 for Mr Keen, and £463,500 for each of Mr Heron and Mr Woodman.
Details of individual entitlements of the directors under the PSP at 30 September 2012, and 30 September 2013 are:
Award date
Date from which
Expiry date
Market price
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron R J Woodman
exercisable
at award
date
Number
Number
Number
Number
Awards outstanding at 30 September 2012
29/09/2008
21/05/2009
04/01/2010
17/12/2010
21/12/2011
29/09/2011
29/09/2018
21/05/2012
21/05/2019
04/01/2013
04/01/2020
17/12/2013§
16/12/2020
21/12/2014§
20/12/2021
66.50p
70.00p
135.20p
182.00p
176.90p
278,286
844,286
451,145
450,661
480,912
-
632,143
337,786
337,424
360,114
-
450,000
240,458
240,200
256,410
-
385,714
206,107
205,886
219,943
2,505,290
1,667,467
1,187,068
1,017,650
Awards made in the year:
28/02/2013
28/02/2015‡
27/02/2023
321.2p
278,757
208,707
148,595
148,595
Awards exercised in the year:
On 18 December 2012
29/09/2008
21/05/2009
29/09/2011
29/09/2018
21/05/2012
21/05/2019
66.50p
70.00p
(278,286)
(411,616)
-
-
(457,198)
(450,000)
On 5 August 2013
21/05/2009
04/01/2010
21/05/2012
21/05/2019
04/01/2013
04/01/2020
70.00p
135.20p
-
-
(174,945)
(337,786)
On 13 August 2013
21/05/2009
04/01/2010
21/05/2012
21/05/2019
04/01/2013
04/01/2020
70.00p
135.20p
(432,670)
(317,330)
-
-
-
-
Awards lapsing in the year:
At 30 September 2013
-
-
-
-
-
1,344,145
906,245
885,663
1,166,245
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
§
These awards will be subject to a performance condition comparing the rank of the Company’s TSR against a comparator group
of companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250, excluding investment trusts, on the date of grant over the three years
commencing on the date of grant. 25% of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting
for upper quartile performance.
60
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
‡
50% of these awards are subject to the TSR test, as above, and 50% are subject to an EPS test. The EPS test provides that 25% of EPS
tested awards will vest where EPS growth is equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 3%, increasing on a straight line basis to full
vesting for EPS growth equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 7% or more.
The share prices at the exercise dates were £2.577 on 18 December 2012, £3.2992 on 5 August 2013 and £3.421 on 13 August 2013.
The awards maturing during the year, granted on 4 January 2010, achieved 100% vesting after the application of the performance criteria.
Awards are exercisable from the date on which the Remuneration Committee determines the extent to which the performance conditions have
been satisfi ed to the tenth anniversary of the grant date.
Share option schemes
Details of individual options held by the directors at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2013 are:
Award date
Date from which
Expiry date
Option price
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron R J Woodman
exercisable
Awards outstanding at 30 September 2012
Number
Number
Number
Number
14/03/2003
18/12/2003
01/12/2004
14/03/2006
18/12/2006
01/12/2007
14/03/2013
18/12/2013
01/12/2014
297.30p
540.40p
555.34p
119,848
61,527
68,874
87,161
46,261
51,656
41,269
25,906
27,730
34,666
21,280
22,778
Awards exercised in the year:
Awards surrendered in the year:6 March 2013
250,249
185,078
94,905
78,724
-
-
-
-
14/03/2003
14/03/2006
14/03/2013
297.30p
(119,848)
(87,161)
(41,269)
(34,666)
Awards lapsing in the year:
At 30 September 2013
-
-
-
-
130,401
97,917
53,636
44,058
In the interests of administrative effi ciency, given the relatively low amount of gain relative to the share price, the options awarded on
14 March 2003 were surrendered in return for a payment equal to the difference between the closing mid price of the shares of the Company
on the preceding day, £3.250 per share, and the exercise price.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
61
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
Deferred Bonus Shares
Details of individual entitlements of the directors to Deferred Bonus Shares at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2013 are:
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Award date
Date from which
Expiry date
Market price
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron R J Woodman
exercisable
at award
date
Number
Number
Number
Number
Awards outstanding at 30 September 2012
11/01/2010
20/01/2011
21/12/2011
01/10/2012
30/09/2013
01/10/2013
30/09/2014
01/10/2014
30/09/2015
130.60p
184.00p
172.63p
60,098
82,248
108,198
42,802
59,672
78,952
27,952
40,288
36,117
38,435
33,446
44,980
250,544
181,426
104,357
116,861
Awards made in the year:
23/11/2012
01/10/2015
30/09/2016
83,297
60,854
27,977
62,003
Awards exercised in the year:
11/01/2010
01/10/2012
30/09/2013
130.60p
(60,098)
(42,802)
(27,952)
(38,435)
At 30 September 2013
273,743
199,478
104,382
140,429
The Deferred Bonus Shares awarded can be exercised for one year from the vesting date. The vesting date is the third anniversary of the start
of the fi nancial year in which the grant is awarded.
The face value of the awards granted during the year (being the number of shares in each case multiplied by £2.0664, that being the average
of the closing prices of the Company’s shares at the end of each of the fi nal fi ve dealing days in September 2012) were £172,125 for
Mr Terrington, £125,750 for Mr Keen, £57,812 for Mr Heron and £128,125 for Mr Woodman.
The awards exercised in the year were exercised on 18 December 2012, when the share price was £2.577.
Rights to the following shares are due to be granted in respect of the compulsory deferral of performance bonuses for the year ended
30 September 2013. The shares, less any clawback, which can be applied by the Remuneration Committee in certain circumstances, will be
exercisable by the recipients from the third anniversary of the grant date, subject to the recipient being employed by the Company at that time:
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
55,302
40,397
24,258
36,906
62
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Matching Share Plan
The individual interests of the directors in the MSP at 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2013 are:
Award date
Market price
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron R J Woodman
at award
date
Number
Number
Number
Number
Awards outstanding at 30 September 2012
05/01/2010§
133.40p
43,249
32,422
22,868
43,808
Awards made in the year:
Awards exercised in the year:
05/01/2010§
Awards lapsing in the year:
At 30 September 2013
133.40p
43,249
32,422
22,868
43,808
-
-
-
43,249
-
(32,422)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
22,868
43,808
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
§
These awards were subject to a performance condition comparing the rank of the Company’s TSR against a comparator group of
companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant.
25% of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance.
No awards were granted under the MSP during the year ended 30 September 2013.
The awards maturing during the year, granted on 5 January 2010, achieved 100% vesting after the application of performance criteria.
The awards exercised during the year were exercised on 5 August 2013 when the price of the Company’s shares was £3.2992 per share.
Awards are exercisable from the date on which the Remuneration Committee determines the extent to which the performance conditions have
been satisfi ed to the tenth anniversary of the grant date.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
63
B3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
Directors’ interests in shares
The interests of the executive directors in the shares of the Company at 30 September 2013 were:
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Unvested awards subject to vesting conditions
PSP
Unvested awards not subject to vesting conditions
Deferred bonus scheme
Total unvested awards
Vested awards
Options
PSP
MSP
Total vested awards
Total outstanding awards
Shares benefi cially held
Total interest in shares
Awards exercised in the year
PSP
MSP
Deferred bonus scheme
N S Terrington
Number
N Keen
Number
J A Heron R J Woodman
Number
Number
1,210,330
906,245
645,205
574,424
273,743
199,478
104,382
140,429
1,484,073
1,105,723
749,587
714,853
130,401
133,815
43,249
97,917
-
-
53,636
240,458
22,868
44,058
591,821
43,808
307,465
97,917
316,962
679,687
1,791,538
1,203,640
1,066,549
1,394,540
647,972
368,679
252,680
89,691
2,439,510
1,572,319
1,319,229
1,484,231
1,439,902
-
60,098
969,929
32,422
42,802
450,000
-
27,952
-
-
38,435
1,500,000
1,045,153
477,952
38,435
The interests of the Chairman and the non-executive directors at 30 September 2013, which consist entirely of ordinary shares, benefi cially
held, were as follows:
R G Dench
E A Tilly
A K Fletcher
P J N Hartill
F J Clutterbuck
Number
117,000
30,000
125,000
7,000
3,214
64
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Share ownership guidelines
All executive directors are encouraged to hold a minimum number of shares in the Company with a value of 200% of their salary, calculated
at 31 December each year on the basis of the average price of the Company’s shares over a rolling three year period. During the year the
Remuneration Committee increased the guideline holding from the previous level of 100% of salary and executive directors should aim to meet
the increased requirement by 30 September 2015. For new appointments the guideline is 100% of salary in the fi rst fi ve years, increasing to
200% by the seventh anniversary of appointment. The number, net of income tax and national insurance, of shares granted under the Deferred
Bonus Plan and vested but unexercised shares under the PSP and MSP count towards the aggregate shares held by each director in respect
of the policy.
Guideline holdings and the actual shares held at 30 September 2013 are set out below:
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
100%
200%
100%
200%
100%
200%
100%
200%
Salary (£)
434,750
434,750
325,500
325,500
231,750
231,750
231,750
231,750
Average share price (p)†
172.675
172.675
172.675
172.675
172.675
172.675
172.675
172.675
Guideline holding (shares)
251,773
503,547
188,504
377,009
134,212
268,423
134,212
268,423
Benefi cially owned shareholding
Vested PSP and MSP (net of tax )
Deferred Bonus Scheme (net of tax)
647,972
93,844
-
368,679
-
-
252,680
126,396
-
89,691
227,647
-
Calculated holding at
30 September 2013
741,816
368,679
379,076
317,338
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
†
average share price over a rolling three year period.
At 30 September 2013, all of the executive directors’ holdings were in accordance with guideline levels.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
65
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
B3.3.3 Other information
The information provided in this section of the Directors’ Remuneration Report is not subject to audit
Performance graph and table
The following graph shows the Company’s TSR performance compared with the performance of the FTSE All Share General Financial
sector index. The General Financial sector has been selected for this comparison because it is the sub-sector index that contains the
Company’s shares.
Five Year Return Index for the FTSE All Share Financial sector as at 30 September 2013
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
FTSE All Share General Financial sector
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
This graph shows the value, by 30 September 2013, of £100 invested in The Paragon Group of Companies PLC on 30 September 2008,
compared with £100 invested in the FTSE General Financial sector index. The other points plotted are the values at the intervening fi nancial
year ends.
Table of historic data
The following table shows the total remuneration, as defi ned by the Regulations, and the amount vesting under short term and long term
incentives as a percentage of the maximum that could have been achieved, in respect of Mr Terrington, the Chief Executive.
Year
2013
2012
2011
2010
2009
66
Single fi gure
Annual bonus
Long-term
of total
against
incentive rates
remuneration
maximum
opportunity
£000
2,655
2,565
2,382
1,209
932
%
85.0
87.5
87.5
75.0
50.0
against
maximum
opportunity
%
100.0
100.0
58.6 and 85.1
58.6
-
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Percentage change in the remuneration of the Chief Executive
The following table shows the change in the certain aspects of the remuneration of Mr Terrington:
Component
Salary
Benefi ts
Bonus
2013
£000
435
14
739
2012
£000
422
14
738
Change
%
3.0
-
0.1
The Group’s pay review taking effect on 1 October 2012 awarded average percentage increases in wages and salaries to employees as a
whole of 2.6%.
The nature and level of benefi ts available to employees in the year ended 30 September 2013 was broadly similar to that in the previous year.
The total amount of bonus paid to employees, excluding the directors in respect of the year ended 30 September 2013 was 44.7% higher than
in 2012, while the PRP pool distributed to employees other than directors and heads of function increased by 10.4% between the two years.
Relative importance of spend on pay
The Regulations require an illustration of the signifi cance of the Group’s expenditure on pay in the context of its operations. Set out below is a
summary of the Group’s levels of expenditure on pay and other signifi cant cash outfl ows.
Wages and salaries
Dividend paid
Loan advances and investment in portfolios
Corporation tax paid
Note
13
44
54
2013
£m
28.1
20.7
448.1
22.0
2012
£m
25.3
12.3
299.7
17.0
Change
%
11.1
68.3
49.5
29.4
Loan advances and investment in portfolios is shown above as this the principal application of cash used to generate income for the Group.
Corporation tax is contributed out of profi t to the UK Government.
Consultations with shareholders and AGM voting
At the Annual General Meeting held on 7 February 2013, all resolutions were passed on a show of hands. Proxy votes lodged in respect of
directors’ remuneration were as follows:
Resolution
Votes for
% for
Votes
against
% against
Discretion
Total votes
Votes
cast
withheld
Adopt remuneration report
197,889,600
Approve PSP
198,526,516
96.1
96.0
7,915,353
8,142,814
3.8
3.9
24,242
205,829,195
876,060
24,152
206,693,482
11,773
The most recent consultation between the Chairman of the Committee and the Chairman of the Group and major shareholders and their
representative bodies took place during October 2013 and the views expressed by the shareholders have been taken into consideration in the
development of the Policy Report and in the implementation of remuneration policy for the year.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
67
B3.3.3 Annual report on remuneration continued
This Directors’ remuneration report, section B3 of the Annual Report and Accounts, including both the Policy Report and Annual Report on
Remuneration has been approved by the Board of Directors.
Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors.
ALAN K FLETCHER
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
26 November 2013
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
68
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
B4. Directors’ report
The directors of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC (registered number 2336032) submit their Report prepared in accordance with
Schedule 7 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 (‘Schedule 7’), which also
includes additional disclosures made in accordance with the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority.
Directors and their interests
The directors of the Company during the year were:
R G Dench
N S Terrington
N Keen
J A Heron
R J Woodman
E A Tilly*
A K Fletcher*
P J N Hartill*
F J Clutterbuck*
* Non-executive directors.
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
The directors’ interests in the shares of the Company are disclosed in the Directors’ remuneration report in section B3. There have been no
changes in the directors’ interests in the share capital of the Company since 30 September 2013.
At 30 September 2013 Mr N Keen held £100,000 of the Company’s 6% Sterling Notes due 2020, issued on 5 March 2013 (2012: £nil).
Other than as stated above the directors had no interests in securities issued by the Company. The directors have no interests in the shares or
debentures of the Company’s subsidiary companies.
The appointment and replacement of the Company’s directors is governed by its Articles of Association, the UK Corporate Governance Code,
the Companies Acts and related legislation and the individual service contracts and terms of appointment of the directors. The powers of the
directors, and their service contracts and terms of appointment, are described in the Corporate Governance section, Section B2. The Articles
of Association may only be amended by the Company’s shareholders in general meeting.
Under article 143 of the Company’s Articles of Association, the Company has qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the benefi t of its
directors which were in place throughout the year and which remain in force at the date of this report, in the form of directors and offi cers
liability insurance.
The UK Corporate Governance Code recommends that all directors should be subject to re-appointment annually and therefore all of the
directors, Mr R G Dench, Mr N S Terrington, Mr N Keen, Mr J A Heron, Mr R J Woodman, Mr E A Tilly, Mr A K Fletcher, Mr P J N Hartill and
Ms F J Clutterbuck, have agreed to voluntarily retire from the Board at the end of the forthcoming Annual General Meeting, and, being eligible,
will offer themselves for re election.
None of the directors has a service contract with the Company requiring more than 12 months’ notice of termination to be given.
From 1 October 2008, a director has had a statutory duty to avoid a situation in which he or she has, or can have, an interest that confl icts or
possibly may confl ict with the interests of the Company. A director will not be in breach of that duty if the relevant matter has been authorised
in accordance with the Articles of Association by the other directors. The Articles of Association include the relevant authorisation for directors
to approve such confl icts.
None of the directors had, either during or at the end of the year, any material interest in any contract of signifi cance with the Company or
its subsidiaries.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
69
B4
Directors’ report continued
Capital structure
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Details of the issued share capital of the Company, together with details of movements in its issued share capital in the year, are given in note
38 to the accounts. The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carries no right to fi xed income. Each ordinary share carries the
right to one vote at general meetings of the Company. The rights and obligations attaching to ordinary shares are set out in the Articles of
Association of the Company.
There are no specifi c restrictions on the size of a member’s holding or on the transfer of shares. Both of these matters are governed by the
general provisions of the Company’s Articles of Association and prevailing legislation. The Articles of Association may be amended by special
resolution of the shareholders. The directors are not aware of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares in respect of voting
rights or which might result in restrictions on the transfer of securities.
Details of employee share schemes are set out in note 15 to the accounts. Votes attaching to shares held by employee benefi t trusts are not
exercised at general meetings of the Company.
The Company presently has the authority to issue ordinary shares up to a value of £99,600,000 and to make market purchases of up to
29,900,000 £1 ordinary shares, granted at the Annual General Meeting on 7 February 2013. These authorities expire at the conclusion of the
forthcoming Annual General Meeting on 6 February 2014.
Purchase of own shares
At 30 September 2007 the Company had, as part of a £40.0 million repurchase programme, repurchased 6,689,000 10p ordinary shares
having an aggregate nominal value of £668,900. The reasons for the repurchase programme were set out in an announcement made by
the Company through RNS on 25 May 2005. On 29 January 2008 these shares were consolidated into 668,900 £1 ordinary shares. All of
these shares were held as at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 as treasury shares, representing 0.2% of the issued share capital
excluding treasury shares, and this holding represents the maximum number of its own £1 ordinary shares held by the Company at any time
during the past year.
Dividends
The directors recommend a fi nal dividend of 4.8p per share (2012: 4.5p per share) which, taken with the interim dividend of 2.4p per share
(2012: 1.5p per share) paid on 26 July 2013, would give a total dividend for the year of 7.2p per share (2012: 6.0p per share).
Substantial shareholdings
As at 31 October 2013, being a date not more than one month before the date of the notice convening the forthcoming Annual General
Meeting, the Company had been notifi ed of the following interests of more than 3% in the nominal value of the ordinary share capital of
the Company:
BlackRock
M & G Investment Management
Legal & General Investment Management
Ignis Asset Management
Standard Life Investments
Henderson Global Investors
Ordinary shares
% Held
39,722,803
16,307,925
11,750,016
10,717,836
9,971,442
9,380,101
13.00%
5.34%
3.85%
3.51%
3.26%
3.07%
70
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
Political expenditure
Company law requires the disclosure of political donations and political expenditure by any Group company. During the year ended
30 September 2013 no such payments were made (2012: £nil).
Auditors
The directors have taken all reasonable steps to make themselves and the Company’s auditors aware of any information needed in preparing
the audit of the Annual Report and Financial Statements for the year, and, as far as each of the directors is aware, there is no relevant audit
information of which the auditors are unaware.
A resolution for the re-appointment of Deloitte LLP as the auditors of the Company is to be proposed at the forthcoming Annual
General Meeting.
Annual General Meeting
The Annual General Meeting of the Company will take place on 6 February 2014 in London. A notice convening the Annual General Meeting
is being circulated to shareholders with this Annual Report and Accounts.
Information presented in other sections
Certain information required to be included in a directors’ report by Schedule 7 can be found in the other sections of the Annual Report, as
described below. All of the information presented in these sections is incorporated by reference into this Directors’ report and is deemed to
form part of this report.
• Commentary on the likely future developments in the business of the Group is included in the Strategic report (Section A).
•
A description of the Group’s fi nancial risk management objectives and policies, and its exposure to risks arising from its use of fi nancial
instruments are set out in note 6 to the accounts.
•
Particulars of events occurring after the balance sheet date are described in notes 25 and 31 to the accounts, and discussed in the
Strategic report (section A).
•
Information concerning directors contractual arrangements and entitlements under share based remuneration arrangements is given in
section B3, the Directors’ remuneration report.
•
Information concerning the employment of disabled persons and the involvement of employees in the business is given in section
A5.1 – ‘Employees’
• Disclosures concerning greenhouse gas emissions are given in Section A5.2 – ‘Environmental policy’
Rule DTR7.2.1 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules requires the Group’s disclosures on Corporate governance to be included in the
Directors’ report. This information is presented in sections B2, B2.1 and B2.2 and the information in these sections is incorporated by reference
into this Directors’ report and is deemed to form part of this report.
Section B4 of this Annual Report, together with the other sections of the Annual Report incorporated by reference, comprise a Directors’ report
for the Group which has been drawn up and presented in accordance with, and in reliance upon, applicable English company law and the
liabilities of the directors in connection with this report shall be subject to the limitations and restrictions provided by such law.
Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on behalf of the Board.
JOHN G GEMMELL
Company Secretary
26 November 2013
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
71
B5. Statement of directors’ responsibilities
in relation to fi nancial statements
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
g
e
t
a
r
o
p
r
o
C
B
The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the fi nancial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.
The directors are required to prepare accounts for the Group in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (‘IFRS’) and
have also elected to prepare company fi nancial statements in accordance with IFRS. In respect of the fi nancial statements for the year ended
30 September 2013, company law requires the directors to prepare such fi nancial statements in accordance with International Financial
Reporting Standards, the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.
International Accounting Standard 1 – ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’ requires that fi nancial statements present fairly for each
fi nancial year the Company’s fi nancial position, fi nancial performance and cash fl ows. This requires the faithful representation of the effects of
transactions, other events and conditions in accordance with the defi nitions and recognition criteria for assets, liabilities, income and expenses
set out in the International Accounting Standards Board’s ‘Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements’. In virtually
all circumstances, a fair presentation will be achieved by compliance with all applicable International Financial Reporting Standards. Directors
are also required to:
• properly select and apply accounting policies;
•
present information, including accounting policies, in a manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and understandable information;
and
•
provide additional disclosures when compliance with the specifi c requirements in International Financial Reporting Standards is insuffi cient
to enable users to understand the impact of particular transactions, other events and conditions on the entity’s fi nancial position and
fi nancial performance.
The directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the fi nancial position
of the company, for safeguarding the assets, for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities and
for the preparation of a Directors’ report and Directors’ remuneration report which comply with the applicable requirements of the Companies
Act 2006.
The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the
preparation and dissemination of fi nancial statements differs from legislation in other jurisdictions.
The directors confi rm that, to the best of their knowledge:
•
the fi nancial statements, prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union, give
a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, fi nancial position and profi t or loss of the Company and of the Group taken as a whole; and
•
the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to
assess the Group’s performance, business model and strategy.
Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on behalf of the Board.
JOHN G GEMMELL
Company Secretary
26 November 2013
72
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
C. Independent auditor’s report
t
r
o
p
e
r
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
a
t
n
e
d
n
e
p
e
d
n
I
C
C1. Independent auditor’s report to the members
of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
r
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
a
t
n
e
d
n
e
p
e
d
n
I
C
Opinion on fi nancial statements of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
In our opinion:
•
the fi nancial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 30 September 2013
and of the Group’s profi t for the year then ended;
•
the group fi nancial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as
adopted by the European Union;
•
the parent company fi nancial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and
as applied in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and
•
the fi nancial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the group
fi nancial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.
The fi nancial statements comprise the Consolidated Income Statement, the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, the
Consolidated and Company Balance Sheets, the Consolidated and Company Cash Flow Statements, the Consolidated and Company
Statements of Movements in Equity and the related notes 1 to 59. The fi nancial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation
is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and, as regards the parent company fi nancial statements, as applied in
accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.
Separate opinion in relation to IFRSs as issued by the IASB
As explained in note 3 to the Group fi nancial statements, the Group in addition to complying with its legal obligation to apply IFRSs as adopted
by the European Union, has also applied IFRSs as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB).
In our opinion the Group fi nancial statements comply with IFRSs as issued by the IASB.
Going concern
As required by the Listing Rules we have reviewed the Directors’ statement in section A4 that the Group is a going concern. We confi rm that:
•
we have not identifi ed material uncertainties related to events or conditions that may cast signifi cant doubt on the Group’s ability to
continue as a going concern which we believe would need to be disclosed in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union;
and
•
we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the fi nancial statements
is appropriate.
However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is not a guarantee as to the Group’s ability to continue
as a going concern.
Our assessment of risks of material misstatement
The assessed risks of material misstatement described below are those that had the greatest effect on our audit strategy, the allocation of
resources in the audit and directing the efforts of the engagement team:
•
the assessment of the Group’s calculation of provisions for impairment losses against loans and receivables is complex and requires
management to make signifi cant judgements regarding expectations of future cash fl ows arising from customers and the realisation of any
security held;
74
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
•
revenue recognition and specifi cally the application of the requirement in IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments’ (‘IAS 39’) to recognise income
on loans using an effective interest rate method is a complex area, requiring management to make signifi cant judgements relating to the
expected life of each loan and the cash fl ows related thereto; and
•
determining the key assumptions used to calculate the present value of the retirement benefi t obligation requires signifi cant management
judgement in relation to infl ation rates, discount rates and mortality rates.
Our audit procedures relating to these matters were designed in the context of our audit of the fi nancial statements as a whole, and not to
express an opinion on individual accounts or disclosures. Our opinion on the fi nancial statements is not modifi ed with respect to any of the
risks described above, and we do not express an opinion on these individual matters.
Our application of materiality
We determined materiality for the Group to be £7.9 million, which is 7.5% of pre-tax profi t and represents 0.9% of equity.
We agreed with the Audit and Compliance Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £156,000,
as well as differences below that threshold that in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to the Audit and
Compliance Committee on disclosure matters that we identifi ed when assessing the overall presentation of the fi nancial statements.
An overview of the scope of our audit
Our group audit scope focused on the principal trading subsidiaries within the Group’s two reportable segments and account for 100% of the
Group’s profi t before tax. They were also selected to provide an appropriate basis for undertaking audit work to address the risks of material
misstatement identifi ed above. Our audit work on the principal trading subsidiaries comprised statutory audits which were executed at levels
of materiality applicable to each individual entity which were much lower than group materiality.
The way in which we scoped our response to the risks identifi ed above was as follows:
•
we challenged the appropriateness of management’s key assumptions used in the impairment calculations for loans and receivables,
including specifi cally the estimation of future cash fl ows, the valuation of the underlying security, and the identifi cation of impaired accounts.
This involved benchmarking the assumptions against external economic and industry data and analysis of the Group’s historic experience.
Sensitivity analysis was also performed in relation to the key assumptions in order to assess the potential for management bias;
•
we challenged management’s assumptions used in the recognition of revenue using the effective interest rate method, including the
impact of early redemptions, and assessed whether the revenue recognition policies adopted were in compliance with IFRS. This involved
benchmarking the assumptions using external economic data and industry reports and the Group’s historic experience. Sensitivity analysis
was also performed in relation to the key assumptions in order to assess the potential for management bias;
•
we evaluated the appropriateness of the principal actuarial assumptions used in the calculation of the retirement benefi t obligation, as set
out in note 50 using market data from our in-house actuarial specialists detailing the range of assumptions used as at 30 September 2013.
We also performed sensitivity analysis over the key assumptions in order to assess the potential for management bias.
The Audit and Compliance Committee’s consideration of these risks is set out in section B2.1.
t
r
o
p
e
r
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
a
t
n
e
d
n
e
p
e
d
n
I
C
Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion:
•
•
the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and
the information given in the Strategic report and the Directors’ report for the fi nancial year for which the fi nancial statements are prepared
is consistent with the fi nancial statements.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
75
t
r
o
p
e
r
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
a
t
n
e
d
n
e
p
e
d
n
I
C
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
• we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from
branches not visited by us; or
•
the parent company fi nancial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.
We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.
Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration have not been
made or the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited is not in agreement with the accounting records and returns. Under the
Listing Rules we are required to review certain elements of the Directors’ remuneration report. We have nothing to report arising from these
matters or our review.
Corporate governance statement
Under the Listing Rules we are also required to review the part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the company’s compliance
with nine provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code. We have nothing to report arising from our review.
Our duty to read other information in the Annual Report
Under International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland), we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, information in the annual report is:
• materially inconsistent with the information in the audited fi nancial statements; or
•
apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, our knowledge of the Group acquired in the course of performing
our audit; or
•
is otherwise misleading.
In particular, we are required to consider whether we have identifi ed any inconsistencies between our knowledge acquired during the audit and
the directors’ statement that they consider the annual report is fair, balanced and understandable and whether the annual report appropriately
discloses those matters that we communicated to the Audit and Compliance Committee which we consider should have been disclosed. We
confi rm that we have not identifi ed any such inconsistencies or misleading statements.
Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement, in section B5, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the
fi nancial statements and for being satisfi ed that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the
fi nancial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us
to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors.
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our
audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an
auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other
than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
76
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Scope of the audit of the fi nancial statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the fi nancial statements suffi cient to give reasonable assurance
that the fi nancial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: whether
the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and the parent company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and
adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of signifi cant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the
fi nancial statements. In addition, we read all the fi nancial and non-fi nancial information in the annual report to identify material inconsistencies
with the audited fi nancial statements and to identify any information that is apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent
with, the knowledge acquired by us in the course of performing the audit. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or
inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.
PETER BIRCH (Senior statutory auditor)
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor
Birmingham, United Kingdom
26 November 2013
t
r
o
p
e
r
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
a
t
n
e
d
n
e
p
e
d
n
I
C
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
77
D. The accounts
D1.1
Consolidated income statement
D1.2
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
D1.3
Consolidated balance sheet
D1.4
Company balance sheet
D1.5
Consolidated cash fl ow statement
D1.6
Company cash fl ow statement
D1.7
Statement of movements in equity
D2
Notes to the accounts
81
81
82
83
84
84
85
86
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
D1.1 Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 30 September 2013
Interest receivable
Interest payable and similar charges
Net interest income
Other operating income
Total operating income
Operating expenses
Provisions for losses
Operating profi t before fair value items
Fair value net gains
Operating profi t being profi t on ordinary activities before taxation
Tax charge on profi t on ordinary activities
Profi t on ordinary activities after taxation for the fi nancial year
Earnings per share
- basic
- diluted
Note
9
10
11
12
17
18
19
2013
£m
272.6
(111.3)
161.3
16.6
177.9
(58.6)
(15.2)
104.1
1.3
105.4
(20.2)
85.2
2012
£m
293.8
(136.0)
157.8
12.4
170.2
(51.9)
(24.1)
94.2
1.3
95.5
(23.3)
72.2
Note
2013
2012
21
21
28.4p
27.5p
24.2p
23.5p
The results for the current and preceding years relate entirely to continuing operations.
D1.2 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 30 September 2013
Profi t for the year
Other comprehensive income
Items that will not be reclassifi ed
subsequently to profi t or loss
Actuarial (loss) on pension scheme
Tax thereon
Items that may be reclassifi ed
subsequently to profi t or loss
Cash fl ow hedge gains / (losses)
taken to equity
Tax thereon
Other comprehensive income for
the year net of tax
Total comprehensive income for the year
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
Note
£m
2013
£m
85.2
2012
£m
£m
72.2
50
22
42
22
(2.8)
0.1
1.2
(0.2)
(0.5)
(0.2)
(2.7)
(0.7)
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
A
e
h
T
D
(1.5)
0.4
1.0
(1.7)
83.5
(1.1)
(1.8)
70.4
81
D1.3 Consolidated balance sheet
30 September 2013
Assets employed
Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Financial assets
Current assets
Other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Total assets
Financed by
Equity shareholders’ funds
Called-up share capital
Reserves
Share capital and reserves
Own shares
Total equity
Current liabilities
Financial liabilities
Current tax liabilities
Other liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Financial liabilities
Retirement benefi t obligations
Deferred tax
Other liabilities
Note
23
25
28
36
37
38
39
46
47
52
53
47
50
51
53
2013
£m
8.5
9.6
9,715.3
2012
£m
9.1
10.7
2011
£m
9.3
11.4
9,505.2
9,891.2
9,733.4
9,525.0
9,911.9
7.6
587.3
594.9
7.3
504.8
512.1
4.7
571.6
576.3
10,328.3
10,037.1
10,488.2
306.2
614.7
920.9
(47.6)
873.3
3.0
5.9
36.2
45.1
301.8
550.2
852.0
(48.5)
803.5
2.0
13.3
36.7
52.0
299.7
490.7
790.4
(48.4)
742.0
1.8
10.7
38.3
50.8
9,383.4
15.7
9.9
0.9
9,159.0
9,674.5
13.9
7.6
1.1
14.4
5.0
1.5
9,409.9
9,181.6
9,695.4
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Total liabilities
9,455.0
9,233.6
9,746.2
10,328.3
10,037.1
10,488.2
Approved by the Board of Directors on 26 November 2013.
Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors.
N S Terrington
Chief Executive
N Keen
Finance Director
82
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
D1.4 Company balance sheet
30 September 2013
Assets employed
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investment in subsidiary undertakings
Financial assets
Current assets
Other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Total assets
Financed by
Equity shareholders’ funds
Called-up share capital
Reserves
Share capital and reserves
Own shares
Total equity
Current liabilities
Financial liabilities
Current tax liabilities
Other liabilities
Non-current liabilities
Financial liabilities
Deferred tax
Other liabilities
Total liabilities
Note
25
26
28
36
37
38
39
46
47
52
53
47
51
53
2013
£m
5.6
678.2
-
683.8
115.0
153.9
268.9
952.7
306.2
423.1
729.3
(39.5)
689.8
1.6
4.8
76.4
82.8
177.7
1.8
0.6
180.1
262.9
952.7
2012
£m
6.7
622.6
-
629.3
80.1
124.5
204.6
833.9
301.8
373.8
675.6
(39.5)
636.1
1.4
4.4
71.1
76.9
120.2
-
0.7
120.9
197.8
833.9
2011
£m
7.7
746.9
4.0
758.6
80.0
189.2
269.2
1,027.8
299.7
322.2
621.9
(39.5)
582.4
1.2
3.3
316.5
321.0
123.6
-
0.8
124.4
445.4
1,027.8
Approved by the Board of Directors on 26 November 2013.
Signed on behalf of the Board of Directors.
N S Terrington
Chief Executive
N Keen
Finance Director
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
83
D1.5 Consolidated cash fl ow statement
For the year ended 30 September 2013
Net cash (utilised) / generated by operating activities
Net cash (utilised) by investing activities
Net cash generated / (utilised) by fi nancing activities
Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
Opening cash and cash equivalents
Closing cash and cash equivalents
Represented by balances within:
Cash and cash equivalents
Financial liabilities
D1.6 Company cash fl ow statement
For the year ended 30 September 2013
Net cash generated / (utilised) by operating activities
Net cash (utilised) / generated by investing activities
Net cash generated / (utilised) by fi nancing activities
Net increase / (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
Opening cash and cash equivalents
Closing cash and cash equivalents
Represented by balances within:
Cash and cash equivalents
Financial liabilities
Note
54
55
56
Note
54
55
56
2013
£m
(31.9)
(1.6)
115.2
81.7
504.2
585.9
587.3
(1.4)
585.9
2013
£m
49.8
(61.7)
41.3
29.4
124.5
153.9
153.9
-
153.9
2012
£m
117.3
(2.2)
(181.9)
(66.8)
571.0
504.2
504.8
(0.6)
504.2
2012
£m
(60.9)
7.6
(11.4)
(64.7)
189.2
124.5
124.5
-
124.5
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
84
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
D1.7 Statement of movements in equity
For the year ended 30 September 2013
Note
44
45
13
22
Total comprehensive income for the year
Dividends paid
Net movement in own shares
(Defi cit) / surplus on transactions in own shares
Charge for share based remuneration
Tax on share based remuneration
Net movement in equity in the year
Equity at 30 September 2012
Equity at 30 September 2013
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
83.5
(20.7)
0.9
(0.4)
3.1
3.4
69.8
803.5
873.3
2012
£m
70.4
(12.3)
(0.1)
(0.2)
2.8
0.9
61.5
742.0
803.5
2013
£m
66.9
(20.7)
-
4.4
3.1
-
53.7
636.1
689.8
2012
£m
61.1
(12.3)
-
2.1
2.8
-
53.7
582.4
636.1
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
85
D2. Notes to the accounts
For the year ended 30 September 2013
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC is a company domiciled in the United Kingdom and incorporated in England and Wales under the
Companies Act 2006 with company number 2336032. The address of the registered offi ce is 51 Homer Road, Solihull, West Midlands,
B91 3QJ. The nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in the Strategic Report in section A2.
These fi nancial statements are presented in pounds sterling, which is the currency of the economic environment in which the Group operates.
2. ADOPTION OF NEW AND REVISED REPORTING STANDARDS
In the preparation of these fi nancial statements no new reporting standards are being applied for the fi rst time.
At the date of authorisation of these fi nancial statements the following International Financial Reporting Standards and Interpretations, which
have not been applied in these fi nancial statements, were in issue but not yet effective:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IFRS 9 – ‘Financial Instruments’;
IFRS 10 – ‘Consolidated Financial Statements’;
IFRS 11 – ‘Joint Arrangements’;
IFRS 12 – ‘Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities’;
IFRS 13 – ‘Fair Value Measurement’;
IAS 27 (Revised) – ‘Separate Financial Statements’;
IAS 28 (Revised) – ‘Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures’; and
• Amendment to IAS 19 – ‘Employee benefi ts’.
The adoption of IFRS 9, as currently in issue, would not be anticipated to have a material impact on the accounting of the Group although
the International Accounting Standards Board (‘IASB’) has announced its intention to expand this Standard in such a way that would require
changes to the valuation and income recognition methods relating to the Group’s Loans to Customers, Borrowings and derivative assets and
liabilities. In November 2013 the IASB announced that the implementation date was being removed from this Standard and that a new date
would be announced when the whole project was closer to completion. The European Union has declined to consider the endorsement of
IFRS 9 until a complete version is issued by the IASB. The Group has yet to conduct a full assessment of its potential impact, pending further
information on the implementation date from the IASB and on endorsement from the European Union.
IFRS 10, 11 and 12 and the revised IAS 27 and 28 form the new IFRS regime for consolidation. The directors do not expect that the entities
included within the consolidated accounts will differ under the new standards from those presently consolidated, nor that the consolidated
results will be changed, although the disclosures provided under the new standards may differ. These standards are expected to be applied
for the fi rst time in the Group’s accounts for the year ending 30 September 2014.
IFRS 13, which is expected to apply to the Group’s accounts from the year ending 30 September 2014 sets out new guidance on the
establishment of fair value for accounting purposes and enhanced disclosures. It will apply to all amounts in the Group’s fi nancial statements
presented at fair value, but is unlikely, in the view of the directors, to have a material impact on the Group’s results or fi nancial position.
The revision to IAS 19, which is expected to apply to the Group’s accounts for the year ending 30 September 2014, will change the amounts
presented in the income statement in respect of the Group’s pension plan, without affecting the surplus or defi cit shown in the balance sheet.
If that Standard had been in force for the fi nancial year ended 30 September 2013 it is estimated that the effect would be to reduce profi t
before tax by £0.8m (2012: £0.4m).
Other Standards and interpretations in issue but not effective do not address matters relevant to the Group’s accounting and reporting.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
86
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
3. ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The fi nancial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European
Union. In the fi nancial years reported upon this means that the fi nancial statements accord also with International Financial Reporting Standards
as approved by the International Accounting Standards Board.
The particular policies applied are described below.
(a) Accounting convention
The fi nancial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, except as required in the valuation of certain fi nancial
instruments which are carried at fair value.
(b) Basis of consolidation
The consolidated fi nancial statements deal with the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries made up to 30 September 2013. Subsidiaries
comprise all those entities over which the Group has control. The results of businesses acquired are dealt with in the consolidated accounts
from the date of acquisition.
In accordance with SIC 12 – ‘Consolidation: Special Purpose Entities’ companies owned by charitable trusts into which loans originated
by group companies were sold as part of its warehouse and securitisation funding arrangements, where the Group enjoys the benefi ts of
ownership, are treated as subsidiaries.
Similarly, trusts set up to hold shares in conjunction with the Group’s employee share ownership arrangements are also treated as subsidiaries.
(c) Going concern
The consolidated fi nancial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis. The directors’ reasons for the adoption of this basis
are given in the Strategic Report in section A4.
(d) Goodwill
Goodwill arising from the purchase of subsidiary undertakings, representing the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over
the fair values of acquired assets, including intangible assets, is held on the balance sheet and reviewed annually to determine whether any
impairment has occurred.
Negative goodwill is written off as it arises.
As permitted by IFRS 1, the Group has elected not to apply IFRS 3 – ‘Business Combinations’ to combinations taking place before its transition
date to IFRS (1 October 2004). Therefore any goodwill which was written off to reserves under UK GAAP will not be charged or credited to the
profi t and loss account on any future disposal of the business to which it relates.
(e)
Intangible assets
Intangible assets comprise purchased computer software and other intangible assets acquired in business combinations.
Purchased computer software is capitalised where it has a suffi ciently enduring nature and is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation.
Amortisation is provided in equal instalments at a rate of 25% per annum.
Other intangible assets acquired in business combinations include brands and business networks and are capitalised in accordance with the
requirements of IFRS 3 – ‘Business Combinations’. Such assets are stated at attributed cost less accumulated amortisation. Amortisation is
provided in equal instalments at a rate of 6.67% per annum.
(f)
Leases
Leases are accounted for as operating or fi nance leases in accordance with IAS 17 – ‘Leases’. A fi nance lease is deemed to be one which
transfers substantially all of the risks and rewards of the ownership of the asset concerned. Any other lease is an operating lease.
Rental income and costs under operating leases are credited or charged to the profi t and loss account on a straight line basis over the period
of the leases.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
87
(g) Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Cost for property held under a sale and leaseback transaction
represents the sale value.
Depreciation is provided on cost in equal annual instalments over the lives of the assets. Land is not depreciated. The rates of depreciation
are as follows:
Freehold premises
2% per annum
Short leasehold premises
over the term of the lease
Computer hardware
Furniture, fi xtures and offi ce equipment
Company motor vehicles
25% per annum
15% per annum
25% per annum
(h)
Investments in subsidiaries
The Company’s investments in subsidiary undertakings are valued at cost less provision for impairment.
(i)
Loans to customers
Loans to customers are considered to be ‘loans and receivables’ as defi ned by IAS 39 – ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’.
They are therefore accounted for on the amortised cost basis.
Loans advanced are valued at inception at the initial advance amount, which is the fair value at that time, inclusive of procuration fees paid
to brokers or other business providers and less initial fees paid by the customer. Loans acquired from third parties are initially valued at the
purchase consideration paid or payable. Thereafter all loans to customers are valued at this initial amount less the cumulative amortisation
calculated using the Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) method. The loan balances are then reduced where necessary by a provision for balances
which are considered to be impaired.
The EIR method spreads the expected net income arising from a loan over its expected life. The EIR is that rate of interest which, at inception,
exactly discounts the future cash payments and receipts arising from the loan to the initial carrying amount.
(j) Finance lease receivables
Finance lease receivables are included within ‘Loans to Customers’ at the total amount receivable less interest not yet accrued, unamortised
commissions and provision for impairment.
Income from fi nance lease contracts is accounted for on the actuarial basis.
(k)
Impairment of loans and receivables
Loans and receivables are reviewed for indications of possible impairment throughout the year and at each balance sheet date, in accordance
with IAS 39. Where loans exhibit objective evidence of impairment, the carrying value of the loans is reduced to the net present value of their
expected future cash fl ows, including the value of the potential realisation of any security, discounted at the original EIR. Loans are assessed
collectively, grouped by risk characteristics and account is taken of any impairment arising due to events which are believed to have taken
place but have not been specifi cally identifi ed at the balance sheet date.
For fi nancial accounting purposes provisions for impairments of loans to customers are held in an allowance account. These balances are
offset against the gross value of the loan when it is written off on the administration system. After this point a salvage balance may be held in
respect of any further recoveries expected on the loan.
(l)
Investments in structured entities
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Investments in structured entities are intended to be held to maturity and are therefore accounted for on the amortised cost basis. The return
from such investments is calculated on the EIR basis.
88
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
(m) Amounts owed by or to group companies
In the accounts of the Company balances owed by or to other group companies are carried at the current amount outstanding less any
provision. Where balances owing between group companies fall within the defi nition of either fi nancial assets or fi nancial liabilities given in
IAS 32 – ‘Financial Instruments: Presentation’ they are classifi ed as ‘Loans and Receivables’ or ‘Other fi nancial liabilities’, respectively.
(n) Cash and cash equivalents
Balances shown as cash and cash equivalents in the balance sheet comprise demand deposits and short-term deposits with banks with initial
maturities of not more than 90 days.
(o) Own shares
Shares in The Paragon Group of Companies PLC held in treasury or by the trustees of the Group’s employee share ownership plans are shown
on the balance sheet as a deduction in arriving at total equity. Own shares are stated at cost.
(p) Taxation
The charge for taxation is based on the profi t for the period and takes into account taxation deferred because of temporary differences.
Temporary differences arise from the inclusion of items of income and expenditure in taxation computations in periods different from those in
which they are included in fi nancial statements.
Tax relating to items taken directly to equity is also taken directly to equity.
(q) Borrowings
Borrowings are carried in the balance sheet on the amortised cost basis. The initial value recognised includes the principal amount received
less any discount on issue or costs of issuance.
Interest and all other costs of the funding are expensed to the income statement as interest payable over the term of the borrowing on an
Effective Interest Rate basis.
(r) Finance lease payables
Balances due on the lease arising from the sale and leaseback of a Group property are recognised in creditors at the total amount payable less
interest not yet accrued. Interest is accrued on the actuarial basis.
The profi t which arose on the sale and leaseback transaction is held within deferred income and is being credited to profi t over the lease term
on a straight line basis.
(s) Derivative fi nancial instruments
Derivative instruments utilised by the Group comprise currency swap, interest rate swap and interest rate option agreements. All such
instruments are used for hedging purposes to alter the risk profi le of the existing underlying exposure of the Group in line with the Group’s risk
management policies.
The Group does not enter into speculative derivative contracts.
All derivatives are carried in the balance sheet at fair value, as assets where the value is positive or as liabilities where the value is negative.
Fair value is based on market prices, where a market exists. If there is no active market, fair value is calculated using present value models
which incorporate assumptions based on market conditions and are consistent with accepted economic methodologies for pricing fi nancial
instruments. Changes in the fair value of derivatives are recognised in the income statement, except where such amounts are permitted to be
taken to equity as part of the accounting for a cash fl ow hedge.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
89
(t) Hedging
For all hedges, the Group documents, at inception, the relationship between the hedging instruments and the hedged items, as well as its risk
management strategy and objectives for undertaking the transaction. The Group also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception and
on an ongoing basis, of whether the hedging arrangements put in place are considered to be ‘highly effective’ as defi ned by IAS 39.
For a fair value hedge, as long as the hedging relationship is deemed ‘highly effective’ and meets the hedging requirements of IAS 39, any gain
or loss on the hedging instrument recognised in income can be offset against the fair value loss or gain arising from the hedged item for the
hedged risk. For macro hedges (hedges of interest rate risk for a portfolio of loan assets) this fair value adjustment is disclosed in the balance
sheet alongside the hedged item, for other hedges the adjustment is made to the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability. Only the net
ineffectiveness of the hedge is charged or credited to income. Where a fair value hedge relationship is terminated, or deemed ineffective, the
fair value adjustment is amortised over the remaining term of the underlying item.
Where a derivative is used to hedge the variability of cash fl ows of an asset or liability, it may be designated as a cash fl ow hedge so long
as this relationship meets the hedging requirements of IAS 39. For such an instrument the effective portion of the change in the fair value of
the derivative is taken initially to equity, with the ineffective part taken to profi t or loss. The amount taken to equity is released to the income
statement at the same time as the hedged item affects the income statement. Where a cash fl ow hedge relationship is terminated, or deemed
ineffective, the amount taken to equity will remain there until the hedged transaction is recognised, or is no longer highly probable.
(u) Deferred taxation
Deferred taxation is provided in full on temporary differences that result in an obligation at the balance sheet date to pay more tax, or a right
to pay less tax, at a future date, at rates expected to apply when they crystallise based on current tax rates and law. Deferred tax assets are
recognised to the extent that it is regarded as probable that they will be recovered. As required by IAS 12 – ‘Income Taxes’, deferred tax assets
and liabilities are not discounted to take account of the expected timing of realisation.
(v) Retirement benefi t obligations
The expected cost of providing pensions within the funded defi ned benefi t scheme, determined on the basis of annual valuations by professionally
qualifi ed actuaries using the projected unit method, is charged to the income statement. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full in
the period in which they occur and do not form part of the result for the period, being recognised in the Statement of Comprehensive Income.
The retirement benefi t obligation recognised in the balance sheet represents the present value of the defi ned benefi t obligation, as adjusted for
unrecognised past service cost, and as reduced by the fair value of scheme assets at the balance sheet date.
Both the return on investment expected in the period and the expected fi nancing cost of the liability, as estimated at the beginning of the period
are recognised in the result for the period. Any variances against these estimates in the year form part of the actuarial gain or loss.
The assets of the scheme are held separately from those of the Group in an independently administered fund.
The charge to the income statement for providing pensions under defi ned contribution pension schemes is equal to the contributions payable
to such schemes for the year.
(w) Revenue
The revenue of the Group comprises interest receivable and similar charges and other income. The accounting policy for the recognition of
each element of revenue is described separately within these accounting policies.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
(x) Fee and commission income
Other income includes administration fees charged to borrowers, which are credited when the related service is performed, fees charged to
third parties for account administration services, which are credited as those services are performed, and commissions receivable on the sale
of insurances, which are taken to profi t at the point at which the Group becomes unconditionally entitled to the income.
90
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
(y) Share based payments
In accordance with IFRS 2 – ‘Share based payments’, the fair value at the date of grant of awards to be made in respect of options and shares
granted under the terms of the Group’s various share based employee incentive arrangements is charged to the profi t and loss account over
the period between the date of grant and the vesting date.
National Insurance on share based payments is accrued over the vesting period, based on the share price at the balance sheet date.
Where the allowable cost of share based awards for tax purposes is greater than the cost determined in accordance with IFRS 2, the tax effect
of the excess is taken to reserves.
(z) Dividends
In accordance with IAS 10 – ‘Events after the balance sheet date’, dividends payable on ordinary shares are recognised in equity once they
are appropriately authorised and are no longer at the discretion of the Company. Dividends declared after the balance sheet date, but before
the authorisation of the fi nancial statements remain within shareholders’ funds.
(aa) Foreign currency
Foreign currency transactions, assets and liabilities are accounted for in accordance with IAS 21 – ‘The Effects of Changes in Foreign
Exchange Rates’. The functional currency of the Group is the pound sterling. Transactions which are not denominated in sterling are translated
into sterling at the spot rate of exchange on the date of transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities which are not denominated in sterling are
translated at the closing rate on the balance sheet date.
Gains and losses on retranslation are included in interest payable or interest receivable depending on whether the underlying instrument is an
asset or a liability, except where deferred in equity in accordance with the cash fl ow hedging provisions of IAS 39.
(bb) Segmental reporting
The accounting policies of the operating segments are the same as those described above for the Group as a whole. Costs attributed to
each segment represent the direct costs incurred by the segment operations and an allocation of the costs of areas of the business which
serve all segments. Such allocations are weighted by the value of loan assets in each segment, adjusted for the relative effort involved in the
administration of each asset class.
4. CRITICAL ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES
Certain of the balances reported in the fi nancial statements are based wholly or in part on estimates or assumptions made by the directors.
There is, therefore, a potential risk that they may be subject to change in future periods. The most signifi cant of these are:
(a)
Impairment losses on loans to customers
Impairment losses on loans are calculated based on statistical models. The key assumptions revolve around estimates of future cash fl ows
from customers’ accounts, their timing and, for secured accounts, the expected proceeds from the realisation of the property. These key
assumptions are based on observed data from historical patterns and are updated regularly based on new data as it becomes available.
In addition the directors consider how appropriate past trends and patterns might be in the current economic situation and make any
adjustments they believe are necessary to refl ect the current conditions.
The accuracy of the impairment calculations would therefore be affected by unexpected changes to the economic situation, variances between
the models used and the actual results, or assumptions which differ from the actual outcomes. In particular, if the impact of economic factors
such as employment levels on customers is worse than is implicit in the model then the number of accounts requiring provision might be
greater than suggested by the model, while falls in house prices, over and above any assumed by the model might increase the provision
required in respect of accounts currently provided.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
91
(b) Effective interest rates
In order to determine the effective interest rate applicable to loans an estimate must be made of the expected life of each loan and hence
the cash fl ows relating thereto. For purchased accounts this will involve estimating the likely future performance of the accounts at the time
of acquisition. These estimates are based on historical data and reviewed regularly. For purchased accounts historical data obtained from
the vendor will be examined. The accuracy of the effective interest rate applied would therefore be compromised by any differences between
actual borrower behaviour and that predicted.
(c) Fair values
Where fi nancial assets and liabilities are carried at fair value, in the majority of cases this can be derived by reference to quoted market prices.
Where such a quoted price is not available the valuation is based on cash fl ow models based, where possible, on independently sourced
parameters. The accuracy of the calculation would therefore be affected by unexpected market movements or other variances in the operation
of the models or the assumptions used.
(d) Retirement benefi ts
The present value of the retirement benefi t obligation is derived from an actuarial calculation which rests on a number of assumptions. These
are listed in note 50. Where actual conditions differ from those assumed the ultimate value of the obligation would be different.
(e) Goodwill and intangible assets arising on acquisition
The value of goodwill and intangible assets recognised on the Group’s acquisition of TBMC was derived from the projected cash fl ows for that
business at the time of acquisition, based on management forecasts. The accuracy of this valuation would therefore be compromised by any
differences between these forecasts and the levels of business activity that the entity might actually have been able to generate in the absence
of the acquisition. This valuation will also be affected by the accuracy of the discount factor used.
The carrying value of the goodwill and intangible assets is dependent on the accuracy of the inputs into the impairment test described in
note 24.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
92
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
5. CAPITAL MANAGEMENT
The Group’s objectives in managing capital are:
• To ensure that the Group has suffi cient capital to meet its operational requirements and strategic objectives;
•
To safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, so that it can continue to provide returns to shareholders and benefi ts
for other stakeholders; and
• To provide an adequate return to shareholders by pricing products and services commensurately with the level of risk.
The Group sets the amount of capital in proportion to risk, availability and cost. The Group manages the capital structure and makes adjustments
to it in the light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the underlying assets, having particular regard to the relative
costs and availability of debt and equity fi nance at any given time. In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure the Group may adjust the
amount of dividends paid to shareholders, return capital to shareholders, issue new shares, issue or redeem other capital instruments, such as
retail or corporate bonds, or sell assets to reduce debt. The Group is not subject to any externally imposed capital requirements.
Following its rights issue in 2008 the Group pursued a progressive dividend policy with the dividend being increased from 3.0p in respect of
that year to 4.0p in respect of the year ended 30 September 2011. In 2012 as a result of the progress of the business, the directors adopted
a new policy under which the dividends will increase so that, by the year ending 30 September 2016, the level of dividend cover will be
maintained in the range 3.0 to 3.5 times.
The expected level of dividend cover in respect of the year, subject to the approval of the fi nal dividend at the Annual General Meeting, is
shown below.
Profi t after tax for the year (£m)
Proposed dividend in respect of the year (£m)
Dividend cover (times)
Note
44
2013
85.2
21.8
3.9
2012
72.2
17.9
4.0
The fi gure stated for the year ended 30 September 2012 has been adjusted to refl ect the actual dividend paid.
Return on equity is defi ned by the Group by comparing the profi t after tax for the year to the average of the opening and closing equity positions
and is derived as follows:
Profi t for the year
Divided by
Opening equity
Closing equity
Average equity
Return on Equity
2013
£m
85.2
803.5
873.3
838.4
2012
£m
72.2
742.0
803.5
772.7
10.2%
9.3%
The Board of Directors regularly review the proportion of working capital represented by debt and equity. Net debt is calculated as total debt,
other than securitised and warehouse debt, valued at principal value, less free cash up to a maximum of the total debt. Adjusted equity
comprises all components of equity (i.e. share capital, share premium, minority interest, retained earnings, and revaluation surplus) other than
amounts recognised in equity relating to cash fl ow hedges.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
93
The debt and equity amounts at 30 September 2013 and at 30 September 2012 were as follows:
Debt
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Bank overdraft
Less: Applicable free cash
Net debt
Equity
Total equity
Less: cash fl ow hedging reserve
Adjusted equity
Total working capital
Debt
Equity
Total working capital
Note
48
48
47
37
42
2013
£m
110.0
60.0
1.4
(170.8)
0.6
873.3
(1.7)
871.6
872.2
2012
£m
110.0
-
0.6
(110.6)
-
803.5
(0.7)
802.8
802.8
0.1%
99.9%
-
100.0%
100.0%
100.0%
In addition at 30 September 2012 the Group held £17.1m of free cash in excess of that shown above.
The stable proportion of working capital represented by equity during 2013 resulted primarily from the operation of the policy described above.
6. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
The principal fi nancial risks arising from the Group’s normal business activities are credit risk, liquidity risk, interest rate risk and currency risk.
The Board operates through the Credit Committee and the Asset and Liability Committee to review and agree policies for managing each
of these risks, as described in the Corporate Governance Statement in Section B2, and they are summarised below. These policies have
remained unchanged throughout the year and since the year end. The position disclosed below is materially similar to that existing throughout
the year.
Use of derivative fi nancial instruments
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
The Group uses derivative fi nancial instruments for risk management purposes. Such instruments are used only to limit the exposure of the
Group to movements in market interest or exchange rates.
It is, and has been throughout the year under review, the Group’s policy that no trading in fi nancial instruments shall be undertaken, and
hence all of the Group’s derivative fi nancial instruments are for commercial hedging purposes only. These are used to protect the Group from
exposures principally arising from fi xed rate lending or borrowing and borrowings denominated in foreign currencies. Hedge accounting is
applied where appropriate, though it should be noted that some derivatives, while forming part of an economic hedge relationship, do not
qualify for this accounting treatment under the IAS 39 rules, while in other cases hedge accounting has not been adopted either because
natural accounting offsets are expected or because complying with the IAS 39 hedge accounting rules would be especially onerous.
The Group has designated a number of derivatives as fair value hedges for accounting purposes. In particular this treatment is used for:
(a) hedging the interest rate risk of groups of fi xed rate prepayable loan assets with interest rate derivatives on a portfolio basis. The Group
believes this solution is the most appropriate as it is consistent with the economic hedging approach taken by the Group to these
assets.
(b) hedging the interest rate risk of fi xed rate corporate bond borrowings with a designated fi xed to fl oating interest rate swap, which was
taken out for this specifi c purpose.
The Group has also designated cash fl ow hedging relationships, principally arising from currency borrowings, where a specifi ed foreign
exchange basis swap, set up as part of the terms of the borrowing is used.
94
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The only derivative fi nancial instrument held by the Company at 30 September 2011 was the swap related to the fi xed rate corporate bond
borrowing described above. This reached its term in the year ended 30 September 2012 and the Company now has no derivative assets
or liabilities.
Credit risk
The Group’s business objectives rely on maintaining a high-quality customer base and place strong emphasis on good credit management,
both at the time of acquiring or underwriting a new loan, where strict lending criteria are applied, and in the collections process.
Primary responsibility for credit risk management across the Group lies with the Credit Committee. The Credit Committee is made up of four
senior members of staff, headed by the Finance Director. Its key responsibilities include setting and reviewing credit policy, controlling applicant
quality, tracking account performance against targets, agreeing product criteria and lending guidelines and monitoring performance and trends.
The assets of the Group and the Company which are subject to credit risk are set out below:
The Group
The Company
Loans to customers
Investments in structured entities
Derivative fi nancial assets
Amounts owed by Group companies
Accrued interest
Cash
Note
31
34
35
36
36
37
2013
£m
8,801.5
23.8
890.0
-
0.2
587.3
2012
£m
8,694.6
9.1
800.4
-
0.2
504.8
Maximum exposure to credit risk
10,302.8
10,009.1
The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its loans to customers.
2013
£m
-
-
-
115.0
-
153.9
268.9
2012
£m
-
-
-
80.1
-
124.5
204.6
While this maximum exposure represents the potential loss which might have to be accounted for by the Group, the terms on which the
Group’s loan assets are funded, described under Liquidity Risk below, limit the amount of principal repayments on the Group’s securitised and
warehouse borrowings in cases of capital losses on assets, signifi cantly reducing the effective shareholder value at risk.
The Group’s loan assets at 30 September 2013 are analysed as follows:
Buy-to-let mortgages
Owner occupied mortgages
Total fi rst mortgages
Secured loans
Loans secured on property
Car loans
Retail fi nance loans
Other loans
Total loans to customers
2013
£m
8,324.4
77.4
8,401.8
248.4
8,650.2
1.3
1.5
148.5
8,801.5
2013
%
94.6%
0.9%
95.5%
2.8%
98.3%
-
-
1.7%
2012
£m
8,196.4
99.2
8,295.6
279.9
8,575.5
2.5
2.0
114.6
2012
%
94.3%
1.1%
95.4%
3.2%
98.6%
0.1%
-
1.3%
100.0%
8,694.6
100.0%
Other loans include unsecured loans either advanced by Group companies or acquired from their originators at a discount.
There are no signifi cant concentrations of credit risk due to the large number of customers included in the portfolios.
The Group’s underwriting philosophy is based on a combination of sophisticated individual credit assessment and the automated effi ciencies
of a scored decision making process. Information on each applicant is combined with data taken from a credit reference bureau to provide a
complete credit picture of the applicant and the borrowing requested. Key information is validated through a combination of documentation
and statistical data which collectively provides evidence of the applicant’s ability and willingness to pay the amount contracted under the
loan agreement.
First mortgages and secured loans are secured by charges over residential properties in England and Wales, or similar Scottish or Northern
Irish securities. Car loans are effectively secured by the fi nanced vehicle.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
95
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Despite this security, in assessing credit risk, an applicant’s ability and propensity to repay the loan remain the principal factors in the decision
to lend.
In considering whether to acquire pools of loan assets or invest in loan portfolios, the Group will undertake a due diligence exercise on the
underlying loan accounts. Such assets are generally not fully performing and are offered at a discount to their current balance. The Group’s
procedures may include inspection of original loan documents, verifi cation of security and the examination of the credit status of borrowers.
Current and historic cash fl ow data will also be examined. The objective of the exercise is to establish, to a level of confi dence similar to that
provided by the underwriting process, that the assets will generate suffi cient cash fl ows to recover the Group’s investment and generate an
appropriate return.
Investments in structured entities represent the Group’s contribution made to special purpose vehicle (‘SPV’) companies established and
controlled by third parties to purchase pools of loan assets. All such investments are denominated in sterling and the underlying loans are made
to United Kingdom borrowers. Cash generated by the assets is distributed to investors in accordance with a specifi ed priority of payments.
The Group has no obligation to make further contributions to the SPV companies concerned.
The management has considered the position of the underlying assets and concluded that they will generate suffi cient cash fl ows to repay
the amount of the investment.
In order to control credit risk relating to counterparties to the Group’s derivative fi nancial instruments and cash deposits, the Asset and Liability
Committee determines which counterparties the Group will deal with, establishes limits for each counterparty and monitors compliance with
those limits. Such counterparties are typically highly rated banks and, for all cash deposits and derivative positions held within the Group’s
securitisation structures, must comply with criteria set out in the fi nancing arrangements. Where a derivative counterparty fails to meet the
required criteria they are obliged under the terms of the instruments to set aside a cash collateral deposit. The amounts of these cash collateral
deposits, which do not form part of the Group’s cash position, are given in note 35.
The Group’s cash balances are held in sterling at London banks in current accounts and as short fi xed term deposits. Credit risk on these
balances, and the interest accrued thereon, is considered to be immaterial.
An analysis of the indexed loan to value ratio (‘LTV’) for those loan accounts secured on property by value at 30 September 2013 is set out
below. For acquired accounts the effect of any discount on purchase is allowed for.
Loan to value ratio
Less than 70%
70% to 80%
80% to 90%
90% to 100%
Over 100%
Average loan to value ratio
2013
First
Mortgages
%
2013
Secured
Loans
%
2012
First
Mortgages
%
30.3
25.6
25.4
14.6
4.1
100.0
77.9
29.5
14.3
14.1
14.3
27.8
100.0
89.0
23.7
22.1
26.4
21.7
6.1
100.0
81.1
2012
Secured
Loans
%
26.2
14.4
14.0
14.2
31.2
100.0
90.9
The regionally indexed LTVs shown above are affected by changes in house prices, with the Nationwide house price index, for the UK as a
whole, registering an annual increase of 5.0% in the year ended 30 September 2013 (2012: decrease of 1.6%).
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
96
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The number of accounts in arrears by asset class, based on the most commonly quoted defi nition of arrears for the type of asset, at
30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012, compared to the industry averages at those dates published by the Council of Mortgage
Lenders (‘CML’) and the Finance and Leasing Association (‘FLA’), was:
First mortgages
Accounts more than three months in arrears
Buy-to-Let accounts including receiver of rent cases
Buy-to-Let accounts excluding receiver of rent cases
Owner Occupied accounts
CML data for mortgage accounts more than three months in arrears
Buy-to-Let accounts including receiver of rent cases
Buy-to-Let accounts excluding receiver of rent cases
Owner Occupied accounts
All mortgages
Secured loans
Accounts more than 2 months in arrears
FLA data for secured loans
Car loans
Accounts more than 2 months in arrears
FLA data for all personal loans
Other loan
Accounts more than 2 months in arrears
2013
%
2012
%
0.35
0.07
4.24
1.16
0.99
1.86
1.75
21.46
17.50
25.52
5.80
0.48
0.06
4.38
1.51
1.22
2.03
1.93
19.42
18.00
18.45
7.20
81.98
62.92
No published industry data for asset classes comparable to the Group’s other books has been identifi ed. Where revised data at
30 September 2012 has been published by the FLA or CML, the comparative industry fi gures above have been amended.
The number of accounts in arrears will be higher for closed books such as the owner occupied mortgage book and the car fi nance, retail
fi nance and unsecured loan books than for comparable active ones, as performing accounts pay off their balances, leaving arrears accounts
representing a greater proportion of the total.
The fi gures shown above for secured loans and other loans include purchased portfolios which generally include a high proportion of cases
in arrears at the time of purchase and where this level of performance is allowed for in the discount to current balance represented by the
purchase price.
The payment status of the carrying balances of the Group’s loan assets, before provision for impairment, at 30 September 2013 and at
30 September 2012 split between those accounts considered as performing and those included in the population for impairment testing, is
shown below.
First Mortgages
Not past due
Arrears less than 3 months
Performing accounts
Arrears 3 to 6 months
Arrears 6 to 12 months
Arrears over 12 months
Possessions and similar cases
Impairment population
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
2013
£m
8,173.6
172.6
8,346.2
5.4
6.4
26.9
38.2
76.9
2012
£m
7,949.4
270.3
8,219.7
6.5
9.2
36.0
49.8
101.5
8,423.1
8,321.2
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
97
Consumer Finance
30 September 2013
Not past due
Arrears less than 2 months
Performing accounts
Arrears 2 to 6 months
Arrears 6 to 9 months
Arrears 9 to 12 months
Arrears over 12 months
Impairment population
30 September 2012
Not past due
Arrears less than 2 months
Performing accounts
Arrears 2 to 6 months
Arrears 6 to 9 months
Arrears 9 to 12 months
Arrears over 12 months
Impairment population
Other loans
Not past due
Arrears less than 1 month
Performing accounts
Arrears 1 to 3 months
Arrears 3 to 6 months
Arrears 6 to 12 months
Arrears over 12 months
Impairment population
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Secured
loans
£m
175.6
22.8
198.4
16.7
7.9
6.6
25.1
56.3
254.7
208.4
30.2
238.6
19.5
8.2
5.9
23.7
57.3
295.9
Car
loans
£m
0.8
0.2
1.0
0.1
-
-
0.7
0.8
1.8
1.5
0.4
1.9
0.1
0.1
-
0.6
0.8
2.7
Retail
fi nance
loans
£m
0.2
-
0.2
-
-
0.1
2.1
2.2
2.4
0.3
-
0.3
-
0.1
0.1
2.2
2.4
2.7
2013
£m
18.6
1.7
20.3
1.5
1.8
3.8
140.2
147.3
167.6
Total
£m
176.6
23.0
199.6
16.8
7.9
6.7
27.9
59.3
258.9
210.2
30.6
240.8
19.6
8.4
6.0
26.5
60.5
301.3
2012
£m
32.1
1.8
33.9
1.4
1.6
2.1
87.5
92.6
126.5
98
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
In the debt purchase industry, Estimated Remaining Collections (‘ERC’) is commonly used as a measure of the value of a portfolio. This is
defi ned as the sum of the undiscounted cash fl ows expected to be received over a specifi ed future period. In the Group’s view, this measure
may be suitable for heavily discounted, unsecured, distressed portfolios, but is less applicable for the types of portfolio in which the Group
has invested, where cash fl ows are higher on acquisition, loans may be secured on property and customers may not be in default. In such
cases, the IAS 39 amortised cost balance, at which these assets are carried in the Group balance sheet, provides a better indication of value.
However, to aid comparability the 84 and 120 month ERC values for the Group’s purchased assets are set out below, analysed by the balance
sheet line on which they appear. These are derived using the same models and assumptions used in the EIR calculations, but the differing
bases of calculation lead to different outcomes.
2013
Carrying
value
£m
2013
84 month
ERC
£m
2013
120 month
ERC
£m
2012
Carrying
value
£m
2012
2012
84 month
120 month
ERC
£m
Loans to
customers
Investments in
structured entities
169.9
272.6
313.3
126.3
219.5
23.8
193.7
31.7
304.3
40.6
353.9
9.1
135.4
13.4
232.9
Amounts shown as loan to customers above include loans disclosed as fi rst mortgages and other loans (note 28).
ERC
£m
250.7
13.4
264.1
Liquidity risk
The Group uses securitisation to mitigate its exposure to liquidity risk, ensuring, as far as possible, that the maturities of assets and liabilities
are matched.
The Group’s originated loan assets are principally fi nanced by asset backed loan notes (‘Notes’) issued through the securitisation process.
In a securitisation deal an SPV company within the Group will issue Notes secured on a pool of mortgage or other loan assets owned by the
SPV. The Notes have a maturity date later than the fi nal repayment date for any asset in the pool, typically over thirty years from the issue date.
The noteholders are entitled to receive repayment of the Note principal out of principal funds generated by the loan assets from time to time,
but their right to the repayment of principal is limited to the cash available in the SPV. Similarly, payment of accrued interest to the noteholders
is limited to cash generated within the SPV. There is no requirement for any Group company other than the issuing SPV to make principal
or interest payments in respect of the Notes. This matching of the maturities of the assets and the related funding substantially reduces the
Group’s exposure to liquidity risk. Details of Notes in issue are given in note 48 and the assets backing the Notes are shown in notes 29 and 30.
In the Group’s consumer fi nance SPVs, principal cash was not required to be repaid to noteholders during an initial period, but instead could
be used to acquire new loans from the Group, subject to underwriting conditions being met. Following the completion of this initial period,
principal cash is repaid in the same way as for other SPVs.
The Group also provides funding to the SPV at inception, subordinated to the Notes, which means that credit risk on the pool assets is
retained within the Group. The Group receives the residual income generated by the assets. These factors mean that the risks and rewards of
ownership of the assets remain with the Group, and hence the loans remain on the Group’s balance sheet.
Cash received in each SPV is held until the next interest payment date, after which the remaining balances become available to the Group. Cash
balances are also held within each SPV to provide credit enhancement for the particular securitisation, allowing interest and principal payments
to be made even if loans default. In order to provide further credit enhancement in certain of the SPVs there exist specifi c economic trigger
events which cause additional cash to be retained in the SPV, rather than being transferred to the Group. While the Group can, if it chooses,
contribute additional cash to cover these requirements, it is under no obligation to do so. During the year one such trigger event occurred in
Paragon Secured Finance (No. 1) plc, one of the Group’s consumer fi nance securitisations, and £2.4m of additional cash was retained in that
company (2012: £nil). Whether any such events in any of the Group’s other SPVs arise in the future will depend on the performance of the
general economy and its impact on mortgage and loan arrears in each SPV. However if all of the remaining trigger events occurred, a total of
£70.5m of additional cash would be retained in the SPV companies (2012: £67.9m). The cash balances of the SPV companies are included
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
within the restricted cash balances disclosed in note 37.
Newly originated mortgage loans are initially funded by a revolving loan facility or ‘warehouse’ from the point of their origination until their
inclusion in a securitisation deal. A warehouse functions in a similar way to an SPV, except that funds are drawn down as advances are made
and repaid when loans are securitised.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
99
On 29 February 2008 the warehouse facility provided to Paragon Second Funding Limited ceased to be available for new drawings, although
assets held within it at that time continued to be funded. Repayment of the principal on these assets is not required unless amounts are
realised from them. The fi nal repayment date of the facility is later than the fi nal due date of the assets it is used to fund.
On 27 September 2010 Macquarie Bank and Paragon Fourth Funding Limited signed a new warehouse facility agreement, which was
renewed on substantially the same terms during the current fi nancial year. This warehouse is available for drawing and redrawing until
13 December 2014 and is used to fund new fi rst charge mortgage loans. After that date the loan has a further two year period for the assets
funded to be sold or refi nanced. Repayment of the principal drawn in respect of assets is not required unless amounts are realised from them
either through repayment, securitisation or asset sales, even after the two year period. There is no further recourse to other assets of the Group
in respect of either interest or principal on the borrowing.
On 26 September 2012 the wholesale division of Lloyds Bank and Paragon Fifth Funding Limited signed an additional warehouse facility
agreement, which was drawn on for the fi rst time during the year and operates in parallel with the Paragon Fourth Funding facility. The term of
the facility is three years and is available to fund new loans in its fi rst twenty four months. As with the Paragon Fourth Funding facility repayment
of the principal drawn in respect of assets is not required unless amounts are realised from them either through repayment, securitisation or
asset sales, even after the initial period. There is no further recourse to other assets of the Group in respect of either interest or principal on
the borrowing
As with the SPVs, the Group provides subordinated funding to the warehouse companies and restricted cash balances are held within them.
Further details of the warehouse facilities are given in note 48 and details of the loan assets within the warehouses are given in note 29.
Between 29 February 2008 and 4 October 2010 the only advances made by the Group were consumer loans and further advances on
existing mortgage accounts, which were funded from existing drawings in the SPV companies. The provision of new consumer loans ceased
on 9 April 2009, when the period over which new loans could be sold to the consumer fi nance SPVs ended. New fi rst mortgage lending
commenced on 5 October 2010.
The securitisation process and the terms of the warehouse facilities effectively limit liquidity risk from the funding of the Group’s loan assets. It
remains to ensure that suffi cient funding is available to fund the Group’s participation in the SPVs, provide capital support for new loans and
working capital for the Group. This responsibility rests with the Asset and Liability Committee which sets the Group’s liquidity policy and uses
detailed cash fl ow projections to ensure that an adequate level of liquidity is available at all times.
The fi nal repayment date for all of the securitisation borrowings and the old warehouse borrowing is more than fi ve years from the balance
sheet date, the earliest falling due in 2033 and the latest in 2050.
The equivalent sterling principal amount outstanding at 30 September 2013 under the SPV and warehouse arrangements, allowing for the
effect of the cross currency basis swaps, described under currency risk below, which are net settled with the loan payments, was £8,324.0m
(2012: £8,240.6m). The total sterling amount payable under these arrangements, were these principal amounts to remain outstanding until
the fi nal repayment date would be £17,363.4m (2012: £16,429.1m). As the principal will, as discussed above, reduce as customers repay or
redeem their accounts, the cash fl ow will in practice be far less than this amount.
In February 2013, the Group initiated a Euro Medium Term Note issuance programme, with a maximum issuance of £1,000.0m, and in March
made an issue under it of £60.0m fi xed term retail bonds falling due for payment in December 2020. The Group has the ability to issue further
notes under the programme within twelve months of its inauguration and it may subsequently be renewed.
The Group’s investments in purchased loan portfolios and structured entities are funded from its free cash balances and these investments
carry no obligation to make further payments. They therefore pose no liquidity risk to the Group.
The total undiscounted amounts, inclusive of estimated interest, which would be payable in respect of the Group’s other borrowings, should
those balances remain outstanding until the contracted repayment date, together with amounts payable in respect of the ‘other accruals’
shown in note 53 are shown below.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
100
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
30 September 2013
Payable in less than one year
Payable in one to two years
Payable in two to fi ve years
Payable in over fi ve years
30 September 2012
Payable in less than one year
Payable in one to two years
Payable in two to fi ve years
Payable in over fi ve years
Corporate
bond
£m
4.1
4.1
118.2
-
126.4
4.1
4.1
122.3
-
130.5
Retail
bonds
£m
3.6
3.6
10.8
68.1
86.1
-
-
-
-
-
Other
accruals
£m
13.2
-
-
-
13.2
11.8
-
-
-
11.8
Total
£m
20.9
7.7
129.0
68.1
225.7
15.9
4.1
122.3
-
142.3
The cash fl ows described above will include those for interest on borrowings accrued at 30 September 2013 disclosed in note 53.
The cash fl ows which are expected to arise from derivative contracts in place at the year end, estimating future fl oating rate payments and
receipts on the basis of the yield curve at the balance sheet date are as follows:
On derivative liabilities
Payable in less than one year
Payable in one to two years
Payable in two to fi ve years
Payable in over fi ve years
On derivative assets
Payable in less than one year
Payable in one to two years
Payable in two to fi ve years
Payable in over fi ve years
Interest rate risk
2013
Total cash
outfl ow /
(infl ow)
£m
0.3
0.2
0.4
1.0
1.9
(0.3)
(0.2)
(0.4)
(1.0)
(1.9)
-
2012
Total cash
outfl ow /
(infl ow)
£m
1.6
0.4
0.8
2.8
5.6
(0.4)
(0.3)
(0.8)
(2.7)
(4.2)
1.4
The Group manages interest rate risk, the risk that margins will be adversely affected by movements in market interest rates, by maintaining
fl oating rate liabilities and matching these with fl oating rate assets, hedging fi xed rate assets and liabilities by the use of interest rate swap or
cap agreements.
The rates of interest payable on the loan facilities and on asset backed loan notes issued in the securitisation process are reset either quarterly
or monthly on the basis of LIBOR. Where asset backed loan notes are issued in foreign currencies, cross-currency basis swaps are put in place
converting the reference interest rate to a sterling LIBOR basis.
The Group’s loan assets predominantly bear LIBOR linked interest rates or are hedged fi xed rate assets. The interest rates charged on the
Group’s variable rate loan assets are determined by reference to, inter alia, the Group’s funding costs and the rates being charged on similar
products in the market. Generally this ensures the matching of changes in interest rates on the Group’s loan assets and borrowings and any
exposure arising on the interest rate resets is relatively short term. Forward rate agreements may be used to hedge against any perceived risk
of temporary increases in LIBOR rates at month ends.
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
101
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
The return to the Group from its investments in structured entities is primarily attributable to the cash generation of the underlying portfolio.
There is no direct exposure to market interest rate risk.
Until the optional repayment date on 20 April 2012, the fi xed rate corporate bond was hedged by use of a long-term interest rate swap
agreement, of notional principal equal to the principal amount of the bond, which converted the interest payable to a LIBOR-linked fl oating rate
basis. Since that date interest has been payable on the Bond at a fi xed rate of 3.729%.
During the year retail bonds were issued under a Euro Medium Term Note Programme. All bonds issued to date bear interest at fi xed rates
only, although the programme includes the facility to issue fl oating rate instruments in the future.
The Group has entered into various interest rate basis swap arrangements to alter the effective basis of interest payments on certain borrowings
to match the underlying assets, though due to their nature and the low notional value of these swaps, they do not have a signifi cant impact
on the Group’s results.
The Asset and Liability Committee monitors the interest rate risk exposure on the Group’s loan assets and asset backed loan notes and
ensures compliance with the requirements of the trustees in respect of the Group’s securitisations and the terms of other borrowings.
To assess the Group’s exposure to interest rate movements the notional impact of a 1% change in UK interest rates on the equity of the Group
at 30 September 2013, and the notional annualised impact of such a change on the operating profi t of the Group, based on the year-end
balance sheet have been calculated.
On this basis a 1% increase in UK interest rates would reduce the Group’s equity at 30 September 2013 by £4.0m (2012: £4.0m) and increase
profi t before tax by £8.2m (2012: £8.4m).
This calculation allows only for the direct effects of any change in UK interest rates. In practice such a change might have wider economic
consequences which would themselves potentially affect the Group’s business and results.
Although certain of the Group’s borrowings have interest rates dependant on US Dollar and Euro LIBOR rates, the effect of the cross currency
basis swaps is such that the Group’s results have no material exposure to movements in these rates. The effects of independent 1% increases
in US or Euro interest rates would be to increase the Group’s equity by £1.2m (2012: £1.2m) and £2.1m (2012: £2.0m) respectively.
The only interest rate risk in the Company arose from the corporate bond described above, until it became a fi xed rate instrument in April
2012. The Company has also issued retail bonds bearing fi xed rates of interest. Assets and liabilities with other group companies bear interest
at fl oating rates based on LIBOR which reset within three months of the balance sheet date. The fi nance lease bears notional interest only; all
other balances are non-interest bearing.
Currency risk
All of the Group’s assets and liabilities are denominated in sterling with the exception of the asset backed loan notes denominated in US dollars
and euros, which are described in note 48. Although IAS 39 requires that they be accounted for as currency liabilities and valued at their spot
rates, a condition of the issue of these notes was that interest rate and currency swaps were put in place for the duration of the borrowing,
having the effect of converting the liability to a LIBOR linked fl oating rate sterling borrowing. As a result the Group has no material exposure to
foreign currency risk, and no sensitivity analysis is presented for currency risk.
The equivalent sterling principal amounts of notes in issue under these arrangements, and their carrying values at 30 September 2013 and
30 September 2012 are:
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
US dollar notes
Euro notes
2013
Equivalent
sterling
principal
£m
2,775.6
1,936.7
2013
Carrying
value
£m
3,232.0
2,373.1
2012
Equivalent
sterling
principal
£m
2,867.5
1,983.0
4,712.3
5,605.1
4,850.5
2012
Carrying
value
£m
3,342.7
2,313.3
5,656.0
None of the assets or liabilities of the Company are denominated in foreign currencies.
102
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Fair values of fi nancial assets and fi nancial liabilities
Fair values have been determined for all derivatives, listed securities and any other fi nancial assets and liabilities for which an active and liquid
market exists.
Derivative fi nancial instruments are stated at their fair values in the accounts. The Group uses a number of techniques to determine the fair
values of its derivative assets and liabilities, for which observable prices in active markets are not available. These are principally present value
calculations based on estimated future cash fl ows arising from the instruments, discounted using a risk adjusted interest rate. The principal
inputs to these valuation models are LIBOR benchmark interest rates for the currencies in which the instruments are denominated, sterling,
euros and dollars. The cross currency basis swaps have a notional principal related to the outstanding currency borrowings and therefore the
estimated rate of repayment of these notes also affects the valuation of the swaps. In order to determine the fair values the management applies
valuation adjustments to observed data where that data would not fully refl ect the attributes of the instrument being valued. The management
reviews the models used on an ongoing basis to ensure that the valuations produced are reasonable and refl ect all relevant factors.
For assets and liabilities carried at fair value, IFRS 7 requires that the measurements should be classifi ed using a fair value hierarchy
refl ecting the inputs used, and defi nes three levels. Level 1 measurements are unadjusted market prices, level 2 measurements are derived
from observable data, such as market prices or rates, while level 3 measurements rely on signifi cant inputs which are not derived from
observable data. As described above the valuations of the Group’s derivatives are based on market information and they are therefore
classifi ed as level 2 measurements. Details of these assets are given in note 35. The Group had no fi nancial assets or liabilities in the year ended
30 September 2013 or the year ended 30 September 2012 valued using level 1 or level 3 measurements.
The fair values of cash and cash equivalents, bank loans and overdrafts and asset backed loan notes, which are carried at amortised cost, are
not materially different from their book values because all the assets mature within three months of the year end and the interest rates charged
on fi nancial liabilities reset on a quarterly basis. While the Group’s asset backed loan notes are listed, the quoted prices for an individual note
may not be indicative of the fair value of the issue as a whole, due to the specialised nature of the market in such instruments and the limited
number of investors participating in it.
In the absence of a liquid market in loan assets the directors have considered the estimated cash fl ows expected to arise from the Group’s
investments in its loans to customers and have concluded that the carrying value of these assets, determined on the amortised cost basis, is
not signifi cantly different from the fair value of the assets derived on a discounted cash fl ow basis.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
103
7.
SEGMENTAL INFORMATION
For internal reporting purposes the Group is organised into two major operating divisions, First Mortgages and Consumer Finance. These
divisions are the basis on which the Group reports segmental information.
The revenue generated by the First Mortgages segment includes interest and fees generated by the buy-to-let and owner-occupied mortgage
assets and other income derived from fi rst charge mortgages. Consumer Finance revenue includes interest and fees generated by second
charge loans, the residual car, retail fi nance and unsecured loan assets, and other sources of income derived from consumer loans. Both of
these divisions include assets originated internally and assets acquired from third parties.
All of the Group’s operations are conducted in the United Kingdom, all revenues arise from external customers and there are no inter-segment
revenues. No customer contributes more than 10% of the revenue of the Group.
Financial information about these business segments is shown below.
Year ended 30 September 2013
Interest receivable
Interest payable
Net interest income
Other operating income
Total operating income
Operating expenses
Provisions for losses
Fair value net gains / (losses)
Operating profi t
Tax charge
Profi t after tax
Year ended 30 September 2012
Interest receivable
Interest payable
Net interest income
Other operating income
Total operating income
Operating expenses
Provisions for losses
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Fair value net gains / (losses)
Operating profi t
Tax charge
Profi t after tax
104
First
Mortgages
£m
209.4
(103.9)
105.5
5.4
110.9
(39.7)
(6.8)
64.4
1.3
65.7
First
Mortgages
£m
231.1
(128.1)
103.0
6.2
109.2
(35.2)
(12.4)
61.6
1.6
63.2
Consumer
Finance
£m
63.2
(7.4)
55.8
11.2
67.0
(18.9)
(8.4)
39.7
-
39.7
Consumer
Finance
£m
62.7
(7.9)
54.8
6.2
61.0
(16.7)
(11.7)
32.6
(0.3)
32.3
Total
£m
272.6
(111.3)
161.3
16.6
177.9
(58.6)
(15.2)
104.1
1.3
105.4
(20.2)
85.2
Total
£m
293.8
(136.0)
157.8
12.4
170.2
(51.9)
(24.1)
94.2
1.3
95.5
(23.3)
72.2
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The assets and liabilities attributable to each of the segments at 30 September 2013, 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 were:
30 September 2013
Segment assets
Segment liabilities
30 September 2012
Segment assets
Segment liabilities
30 September 2011
Segment assets
Segment liabilities
First
Mortgages
£m
Consumer
Finance
£m
9,813.7
(9,093.6)
720.1
9,541.3
(8,862.4)
678.9
10,009.3
(9,400.2)
609.1
514.6
(361.4)
153.2
495.8
(371.2)
124.6
478.9
(346.0)
132.9
Total
£m
10,328.3
(9,455.0)
873.3
10,037.1
(9,233.6)
803.5
10,488.2
(9,746.2)
742.0
All of the assets shown above were located in the United Kingdom.
The total additions to non-current assets, excluding fi nancial instruments and deferred tax assets, attributable to each segment during the
years ended 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 was:
2013
2012
Being:
2013
2012
First
Mortgages
Consumer
Finance
£m
1.5
2.3
Intangible
Assets
(Note 23)
£m
0.6
0.8
£m
0.1
0.1
Property,
Plant and
Equipment
(Note 25)
£m
1.0
1.6
Total
£m
1.6
2.4
Total
£m
1.6
2.4
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
105
8.
REVENUE
Interest receivable
Other income
Total revenue
Arising from:
First Mortgages
Consumer Finance
Total revenue
9.
INTEREST RECEIVABLE
Interest on loans to customers
Other interest receivable
Income from structured entities
Total interest on fi nancial assets
Return on pension scheme assets
2013
£m
272.6
16.6
289.2
214.8
74.4
289.2
2013
£m
262.8
2.1
4.1
269.0
3.6
272.6
2012
£m
293.8
12.4
306.2
237.3
68.9
306.2
2012
£m
282.0
2.8
5.5
290.3
3.5
293.8
Interest on loans to customers includes £8.5m (2012: £9.8m) charged on accounts where an impairment provision has been made.
10.
INTEREST PAYABLE AND SIMILAR CHARGES
On asset backed loan notes
On corporate bond
On retail bonds
On bank loans and overdrafts
Total interest on fi nancial liabilities
On pension scheme liability
On fi nance leases
Other fi nance costs
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
2013
£m
74.3
4.1
2.1
24.9
105.4
3.8
0.9
1.2
111.3
2012
£m
101.5
3.9
-
24.8
130.2
3.9
1.0
0.9
136.0
106
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
11. OTHER OPERATING INCOME
Loan account fee income
Insurance income
Third party servicing
Other income
12. OPERATING EXPENSES
Employment costs
Auditor remuneration
Amortisation of intangible assets
Depreciation
Operating lease rentals
Other administrative costs
2013
£m
4.4
2.0
9.5
0.7
16.6
2013
£m
37.5
1.9
1.2
2.1
2.0
13.9
58.6
2012
£m
5.0
2.5
3.9
1.0
12.4
2012
£m
33.1
1.2
1.0
2.1
2.6
11.9
51.9
Note
13
16
23
25
58
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
107
13. EMPLOYEES
The average number of persons (including directors) employed by the Group during the year was 814 (2012: 722). The number of employees
at the end of the year was 874 (2012: 754).
Staff costs incurred during the year in respect of these employees were:
Share based remuneration
Other wages and salaries
Total wages and salaries
National Insurance on share based remuneration
Other social security costs
Total social security costs
Defi ned benefi t pension cost
Other pension costs
Total pension costs
Total staff costs
2013
£m
3.1
28.1
1.9
2.4
1.7
0.3
2012
£m
2.8
25.3
1.0
2.3
1.5
0.2
2013
£m
31.2
4.3
2.0
37.5
2012
£m
28.1
3.3
1.7
33.1
Details of the pension schemes operated by the Group are given in note 50.
The Company has no employees. Details of the directors’ remuneration are given in note 14.
14. KEY MANAGEMENT REMUNERATION
The remuneration of the directors, who are the key management personnel of the Group and the Company, is set out below in aggregate in
accordance with IAS 24 – ‘Related Party Transactions’. Further information about the remuneration of individual directors is provided in the
Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration in section B3.3.2.
Salaries and fees
Cash amount of bonus
Social security costs
Short-term employee benefi ts
Post-employment benefi ts
IFRS 2 cost in respect of directors
National Insurance thereon
Share based payment
2013
£m
1.7
1.6
0.6
1.9
1.8
2013
£m
3.9
0.5
3.7
8.1
2012
£m
1.5
1.5
0.4
0.4
1.0
2012
£m
3.4
0.5
1.4
5.3
Post-employment benefi ts shown above are shown as ‘Pension allowance’ in section B3.3.2. Costs in respect of share awards shown in the
Annual Report on Remuneration are determined on a different basis to the IFRS 2 charge shown above.
Social security costs paid in respect of directors are required to be included in this note by IAS 24, but do not fall within the scope of the
disclosures in the Directors’ Remuneration Report.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
108
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
15. SHARE BASED REMUNERATION
During the year the Group had various share based payment arrangements with employees. They are accounted for by the Group and the
Company as shown below.
The effect of the share based payment arrangements on the Group’s profi t is shown in note 13.
Further details of share based payment arrangements are given in the Report of the Board to the Shareholders on Directors’ Remuneration in
section B3.3.2.
(a)
Share option schemes
Options under the Executive Share Option (‘Executive’) schemes have been granted to directors and senior employees from time to time, on
the basis of performance and at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee. These options vest so long as the grantee is still employed
by the Group at the end of the vesting period and, where applicable, performance criteria have been satisfi ed. The Executive schemes are no
longer available for the grant of further awards.
The Group also operates an All Employee Share Option (‘Sharesave’) scheme. Grants under this scheme vest after the completion of
the appropriate service period and subject to a savings requirement A reconciliation of movements in the number and weighted average
exercise price of options over £1 ordinary shares during the year ended 30 September 2013 and the year ended 30 September 2012 is
shown below.
Options outstanding
At 1 October 2012
Granted in the year
Exercised or surrendered in the year
Lapsed during the year
At 30 September 2013
Options exercisable
2013
Number
2013
Weighted
average
exercise price
p
2012
Number
2012
Weighted
average
exercise price
p
3,510,184
-
(1,375,702)
(376,321)
132.40
-
73.49
276.26
3,385,388
1,117,800
(377,402)
(615,602)
1,758,161
147.66
3,510,184
510,890
471.65
764,627
202.63
142.56
63.51
323.15
132.40
437.64
The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at 30 September 2013 was 15.3 months (2012: 16.6 months).
The weighted average market price at exercise for share options exercised in the year was 326.46p (2012: 168.47p).
Options are outstanding under the Executive and Sharesave schemes to purchase ordinary shares as follows:
Grant date
Period exercisable
Exercise price
Executive Schemes
14/03/2003
18/12/2003
01/12/2004
Sharesave Schemes
20/06/2007
18/07/2008
20/07/2010
20/07/2010
20/12/2011
20/12/2011
14/03/2006 to 14/03/2013
18/12/2006 to 18/12/2013
01/12/2007 to 01/12/2014
01/08/2012 to 01/02/2013
01/09/2013 to 01/03/2014
01/09/2013 to 01/03/2014
01/09/2015 to 01/03/2016
01/02/2015 to 01/08/2015
01/02/2017 to 01/08/2017
297.30p
540.40p
555.34p
685.84p
63.00p
100.32p
100.32p
142.56p
142.56p
Number
2013
-
188,190
236,942
Number
2012
336,348
188,190
236,942
425,132
761,480
-
51,666
31,035
183,876
898,247
168,205
3,147
1,031,760
441,073
183,876
920,643
168,205
1,333,029
2,748,704
1,758,161
3,510,184
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
109
The numbers of share options outstanding and the exercise prices under each of the arrangements shown above which was outstanding
at the time of the share consolidation on 29 January 2008 and the rights issue on 21 February 2008 were adjusted in accordance with the
respective scheme rules.
A number of the above options were granted to former employees whose rights terminate at the later of twelve months following redundancy
or forty-two months after the issue of the options.
The fair value of options granted is determined using a Binomial model. No awards were made in the year ended 30 September 2013. Details
of the awards over £1 ordinary shares made in the year ended 30 September 2012, which were all made under the Sharesave scheme, are
shown below.
Grant date
Number of awards granted
Market price at date of grant
Contractual life (years)
Fair value per share at date of grant
Inputs to valuation model
Expected volatility
Expected life at grant date (years)
Risk-free interest rate
Expected dividend yield
Expected annual departures
20/12/11
20/12/11
945,387
172,413
175.50p
3.0
71.67p
66.27%
3.5
1.35%
2.28%
5.00%
175.50p
5.0
72.05p
66.27%
5.5
1.35%
2.28%
5.00%
The expected volatility of the share price used in determining the fair value is based on the annualised standard deviation of daily changes in
price over the six years preceding the grant date.
(b)
Paragon Performance Share Plan
Awards under this plan comprise a right to acquire ordinary shares in the Company for nil or nominal payment and will vest on the third
anniversary of their granting, to the extent that the applicable performance criteria have been satisfi ed, if the holder is still employed by the
Group. The awards will lapse to the extent that the performance condition has not been satisfi ed on the third anniversary.
The conditional entitlements outstanding under this scheme at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 were:
Grant date
09/01/2007
28/03/2007
14/06/2007
26/09/2007
26/11/2007
18/03/2008
29/09/2008
21/05/2009
04/01/2010
02/09/2010
17/12/2010
21/12/2011
28/02/2013
23/09/2013
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Period exercisable
09/01/2010 to 09/01/2017 †
28/03/2010 to 28/03/2017 †
14/06/2010 to 14/06/2017 †
26/09/2010 to 26/09/2017 †
26/11/2010 to 26/11/2017 †
18/03/2011 to 18/03/2018 †
29/09/2011 to 29/09/2018 †
21/05/2012 to 21/05/2019 †
04/01/2013 to 04/01/2020 †
02/09/2013 to 02/09/2020 †
17/12/2013 to 17/12/2020 *
21/12/2014 to 21/12/2021 *
28/02/2016 to 28/02/2023 ‡
23/09/2016 to 23/09/2023 ‡
Number
2013
3,294
3,164
6,320
10,032
25,200
95,975
-
556,580
784,520
-
1,906,736
2,154,577
1,318,542
20,894
Number
2012
3,294
3,164
6,320
10,032
30,588
103,345
278,287
2,605,821
1,797,822
141,844
1,906,736
2,154,577
-
-
6,885,834
9,041,830
† These awards, which were conditional on the achievement of performance based criteria, have now vested.
*
The receipt of these shares is subject to a performance condition comparing the rank of the Company’s TSR against a comparator group
of companies comprising the constituents of the FTSE-250 on the date of grant over the three years commencing on the date of grant.
25% of the awards will vest for median performance, increasing on a straight line basis to full vesting for upper quartile performance.
‡
50% of these awards are subject to the TSR test, as above, and 50% are subject to an EPS test. The EPS test provides that 25% of EPS
tested awards will vest where EPS growth is equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 3%, increasing on a straight line basis to full
vesting for EPS growth equal to the increase in the retail price index plus 7% or more.
110
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The number of share options outstanding and the exercise price under each of the arrangements shown above which were outstanding at the
time of the share consolidation on 29 January 2008 and the rights issue on 21 February 2008 were adjusted in accordance with the respective
scheme rules.
The fair value of awards granted under the Performance Share Plan is determined using a Monte Carlo simulation model, to take account of
the effect of the market based condition. Details of the awards over £1 ordinary shares made in the year ended 30 September 2013 and the
year ended 30 September 2012 are shown below:
Grant date
28/02/13
23/09/13
21/12/11
Number of awards granted
Market price at date of grant
Fair value per share at date of grant
Inputs to valuation model
Expected volatility
Risk-free interest rate
Expected dividend yield
1,318,542
20,894
2,154,576
321.20p
187.11p
311.10p
218.68p
176.90p
105.53p
32.80%
0.68%
1.92%
31.43%
1.72%
2.22%
45.13%
1.35%
2.26%
For all of the above grants the contractual life and expected life at grant date is three years and no departures are expected.
For awards granted before 18 July 2008 the expected volatility of the share price used in determining the fair value was based on the
annualised standard deviation of daily changes in price over the previous year from the grant date. The expected volatility for awards granted
between this date and 30 September 2008 is calculated using the same method but using daily changes in price over the six years preceding
the grant date. The expected volatility for awards granted after this date is calculated using the same method but using daily changes in price
over the three years preceding the grant date.
(c) Deferred Bonus awards
Awards under this scheme comprise a right to acquire ordinary shares in the Company for nil or nominal payment and will vest on the third
anniversary of their granting.
The conditional entitlements outstanding under this scheme at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 were:
Grant date
05/01/2010
11/01/2011
21/12/2011
23/11/2012
Period exercisable
01/10/2012 to 30/09/2013
01/10/2013 to 30/09/2014
01/10/2014 to 30/09/2015
01/10/2015 to 30/09/2016
Number
2013
-
215,654
301,025
259,537
Number
2012
169,287
215,654
301,025
-
776,216
685,966
The shares awarded can be exercised from one year from the vesting date. The vesting date is the third anniversary of the start of the fi nancial
year in which the grant is awarded.
The fair value of Deferred Bonus awards issued in the year was determined using a Black-Scholes Merton model. Details of the awards over
£1 ordinary shares made in the year ended 30 September 2013 and the year ended 30 September 2012 are shown below.
Grant date
Number of awards granted
Market price at date of grant
Fair value per share at date of grant
Inputs to valuation model
Risk-free interest rate
Expected dividend yield
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
23/11/12
21/12/11
259,537
301,025
248.4p
231.0p
176.90p
165.30p
0.78%
2.42%
1.35%
2.26%
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
111
(d) Matching Share Plan
Awards under this plan comprise a right to acquire ordinary shares in the Company for nil or nominal payment and will vest on the third
anniversary of their granting to the extent that the applicable performance criteria have been satisfi ed, if the holder is still employed by the
Group. The awards will lapse to the extent that the performance condition has not been satisfi ed on the third anniversary.
The conditional entitlements outstanding under this scheme at 30 September 2013 and at 30 September 2012 were:
Grant date
09/01/2007
02/01/2008
05/01/2010
Period exercisable
09/01/2010 to 09/01/2017
02/01/2011 to 02/01/2018
05/01/2013 to 05/01/2023
Number
2013
5,625
22,329
109,925
Number
2012
5,625
22,329
142,347
137,879
170,301
The numbers of share options outstanding and the exercise prices under each of the arrangements shown above which was outstanding
at the time of the share consolidation on 29 January 2008 and the rights issue on 21 February 2008 were adjusted in accordance with the
respective scheme rules.
The fair value of awards granted under the Matching Share Plan is determined using a Monte Carlo simulation model, to take account of the
effect of the market based condition. No awards were made in the year ended 30 September 2013 or the year ended 30 September 2012.
16. AUDITOR REMUNERATION
The analysis of fees payable to the Company’s auditors and their associates, excluding irrecoverable VAT, required by the Companies (Disclosure
of Auditor Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements) Regulations 2008 is set out below. This analysis includes amounts charged to the
profi t and loss account or included within the issue costs of debt and equity in respect of fees paid to the Group auditors and their associates.
Audit fee of the company
Other services
Audit of subsidiary undertakings pursuant to legislation
Total audit fees
Audit related assurance services
Interim review
Tax compliance services
Tax advisory services
2013
£000
126
571
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Other assurance services
Securitisation reporting
Corporate fi nance services
Other services
Total fees
Irrecoverable VAT
Total cost to the Group
Of which:
Charged to profi t and loss account (note 12)
Included in issue costs of debt
Total cost to the Group
2013
£000
178
305
483
40
697
145
83
260
1,708
342
2,050
1,876
174
2,050
2012
£000
2012
£000
118
295
172
288
460
40
413
59
-
102
1,074
215
1,289
1,219
70
1,289
112
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
In addition to the amounts above, the auditors received fees of £7,000 (2012: £7,000), excluding VAT, in respect of the audit of the Group
pension scheme.
Fees paid to the auditors and their associates for non-audit services to the Company are not disclosed because the consolidated accounts of
the Group are required to disclose such fees on a consolidated basis.
17. PROVISIONS FOR LOSSES
Impairment of fi nancial assets (note 32)
First mortgage loans
Other secured loans
Finance lease receivables
Retail fi nance loans
Other loans
18. FAIR VALUE NET GAINS
Net gain on derivatives designated as fair value hedges
Fair value adjustments from hedge accounting
Ineffectiveness of fair value hedges
Ineffectiveness of cash fl ow hedges
Net gains on other derivatives
2013
£m
6.8
4.2
0.1
-
4.1
15.2
2013
£m
1.2
(1.2)
-
-
1.3
1.3
2012
£m
12.2
6.0
0.5
0.1
5.3
24.1
2012
£m
2.2
(2.2)
-
-
1.3
1.3
The fair value net gain represents the accounting volatility on derivative instruments which are matching risk exposure on an economic basis
generated by the requirements of IAS 39. Some accounting volatility arises on these items due to accounting ineffectiveness on designated
hedges, or because hedge accounting has not been adopted or is not achievable on certain items. The losses and gains are primarily due
to timing differences in income recognition between the derivative instruments and the economically hedged assets and liabilities. Such
differences will reverse over time and have no impact on the cash fl ows of the Group.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
113
19.
TAX CHARGE ON PROFIT ON ORDINARY ACTIVITIES
(a)
Analysis of charge in the year
Current tax
UK Corporation Tax on profi ts of the period
Adjustment in respect of prior periods
Total current tax
Deferred tax
Tax charge on profi t on ordinary activities
(b)
Deferred tax charge for the year
The deferred tax charge in the income statement comprises the following temporary differences:
Accelerated tax depreciation
Retirement benefi t obligations
Impairment and other provisions
Utilisation of tax losses
Other timing differences
Deferred tax charge for the year
Recognition of liability not previously recognised
Change in tax rate
Deferred tax charge (note 51)
2013
£m
18.4
(0.1)
18.3
1.9
20.2
2013
£m
-
0.2
0.3
2.6
(1.1)
2.0
2.2
(2.3)
1.9
2012
£m
20.0
(0.4)
19.6
3.7
23.3
2012
£m
0.1
0.3
1.8
3.0
(0.3)
4.9
-
(1.2)
3.7
During the year ended 30 September 2012 the Government enacted provisions reducing the rate of corporation tax from 26.0% to
24.0% with effect from 1 April 2012 and 23.0% from 1 April 2013. During the year ended 30 September 2013 the Government enacted
provisions further reducing the rate of corporation tax to 21.0% with effect from 1 April 2014 and 20.0% from 1 April 2015. Therefore the
standard rate of corporation tax applicable to the Group for the year ended 30 September 2013 was 23.5%, the rate for the year ending
30 September 2014 is expected to be 22.0%, the rate for the year ending 30 September 2015 is expected to be 20.5% and the rate in
subsequent years is expected to be 20.0%. The expected impact on deferred tax balances of the changes to 24.0% and 23.0% was
accounted for in the year ended 30 September 2012 and the expected impact of the changes to 21.0% and 20.0% has been accounted for
in the year ended 30 September 2013.
(c)
Factors affecting tax charge for the year
The tax assessed for the year is lower than the standard rate of corporation tax in the United Kingdom of 23.5% (2012: 25%). The differences
are explained below:
Profi t on ordinary activities before taxation
Profi t on ordinary activities multiplied by standard rate of
corporation tax in the UK of 23.5% (2012: 25%)
Effects of:
Permanent differences
Change in rate of taxation on deferred tax assets and liabilities
Prior year (credit)
Tax charge for the year
2013
£m
105.4
24.8
(2.2)
(2.3)
(0.1)
20.2
2012
£m
95.5
23.9
1.0
(1.2)
(0.4)
23.3
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
114
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
20. PROFIT ATTRIBUTABLE TO MEMBERS OF THE PARAGON GROUP OF COMPANIES PLC
The Company’s profi t after tax for the fi nancial year amounted to £66.9m (2012: £61.1m). A separate income statement has not been prepared
for the Company under the provisions of Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.
The Company has no other items of comprehensive income for the years ended 30 September 2013 or 30 September 2012.
21. EARNINGS PER SHARE
Earnings per ordinary share is calculated as follows:
Profi t for the year (£m)
Basic weighted average number of ordinary shares ranking for
dividend during the year (million)
Dilutive effect of the weighted average number of share options
and incentive plans in issue during the year (million)
Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares ranking
for dividend during the year (million)
Earnings per ordinary share
- basic
- diluted
22.
TAX CREDITED / (CHARGED) TO EQUITY
On actuarial (loss) on pension scheme (note 50)
On gains on cash fl ow hedges (note 42)
Tax on items recognised in comprehensive income
On share based payment (note 43)
Total tax credited to equity
Of which
Current tax
Deferred tax (note 51)
2013
85.2
300.5
9.9
2012
72.2
297.8
9.4
310.4
307.2
28.4p
27.5p
24.2p
23.5p
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
0.1
(0.2)
(0.1)
3.4
3.3
3.7
(0.4)
3.3
2012
£m
(0.2)
0.4
0.2
0.9
1.1
-
1.1
1.1
2013
£m
2012
£m
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Included in tax credited to equity in the year ended 30 September 2013 is £0.8m (2012: £0.4m) charged in respect of the effect of the changes
in corporation tax rates described in note 19 on deferred tax assets.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
115
23.
INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Goodwill
(note 24)
Computer
software
Cost
At 1 October 2011
Additions
Disposals
At 30 September 2012
Additions
Disposals
At 30 September 2013
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
At 1 October 2011
Amortisation charge for the year
On disposals
At 30 September 2012
Amortisation charge for the year
On disposals
At 30 September 2013
Net book value
At 30 September 2013
At 30 September 2012
At 30 September 2011
£m
7.6
-
-
7.6
-
-
7.6
6.0
-
-
6.0
-
-
6.0
1.6
1.6
1.6
£m
3.3
0.8
-
4.1
0.6
(0.4)
4.3
2.2
0.5
-
2.7
0.6
(0.4)
2.9
1.4
1.4
1.1
Other
intangible
assets
£m
8.1
-
-
8.1
-
-
8.1
1.5
0.5
-
2.0
0.6
-
2.6
5.5
6.1
6.6
Total
£m
19.0
0.8
-
19.8
0.6
(0.4)
20.0
9.7
1.0
-
10.7
1.2
(0.4)
11.5
8.5
9.1
9.3
Other intangible assets comprise brands and the benefi t of business networks recognised on the acquisition of subsidiary companies.
24. GOODWILL
The goodwill carried in the accounts was recognised on the acquisition of The Business Mortgage Company and its subsidiaries (‘TBMC’)
in December 2008. The cash generating unit to which this goodwill was attributed for impairment testing purposes was TBMC, which is
the lowest level within the Group at which this goodwill is currently monitored, though the operations of the acquired entity will, in time, be
integrated with those of the First Mortgage division.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
An impairment review undertaken at 30 September 2009 indicated a write down of £6.0m which was charged to the profi t and loss account.
Further reviews were undertaken at each year-end up to 30 September 2013 each of which indicated no further impairment.
The recoverable amount of TBMC used in this impairment testing is determined on a value in use basis using pre-tax cash fl ow projections
based on fi nancial budgets approved by the Board covering a four year period. The pre-tax discount rate applied to the cash fl ow projection
is 6.45% and cash fl ows beyond the four year budget are extrapolated using a 2.0% growth rate, being the average long term growth rate in
the United Kingdom economy over a twenty year period.
116
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The key assumptions underlying the value in use calculation for the TBMC business are:
•
Level of business activity, based on management expectations. Management have concluded that the levels of activity assumed for
the purpose of this forecast are reasonable, based on past experience and the current economic environment.
• Discount rate, which is based on the Group’s cost of capital.
The directors believe that no reasonably possible change in any of the key assumptions above would cause the carrying value of the unit to
exceed its recoverable amount.
25. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
(a)
The Group
Cost
At 1 October 2011
Additions
Disposals
At 30 September 2012
Additions
Disposals
At 30 September 2013
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 October 2011
Charge for the year
On disposals
At 30 September 2012
Charge for the year
On disposals
At 30 September 2013
Net book value
At 30 September 2013
At 30 September 2012
At 30 September 2011
Land and
Buildings
£m
Plant and
machinery
£m
24.3
0.4
-
24.7
0.4
(1.3)
23.8
14.9
1.4
-
16.3
1.2
(1.3)
16.2
7.6
8.4
9.4
7.1
1.2
(1.6)
6.7
0.6
(0.4)
6.9
5.1
0.7
(1.4)
4.4
0.9
(0.4)
4.9
2.0
2.3
2.0
Total
£m
31.4
1.6
(1.6)
31.4
1.0
(1.7)
30.7
20.0
2.1
(1.4)
20.7
2.1
(1.7)
21.1
9.6
10.7
11.4
The net book value of land and buildings includes £5.6m in respect of land and buildings held under fi nance leases (2012: £6.7m,
2011: £7.7m).
After the year end, on 4 November 2013, the Group acquired the freehold in its head offi ce building, which it had occupied under the terms
of a sale and leaseback agreement. The cash consideration paid was £23.7m and on the completion of the transaction the leasehold fi xed
asset included above at a value of £5.6m and the related lease creditor, included in fi nancial liabilities at 30 September 2013 at £10.2m
(note 49) were both extinguished.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
117
(b)
The Company
Cost
At 1 October 2011, 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2013
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 October 2011
Charge for the year
At 30 September 2012
Charge for the year
At 30 September 2013
Net book value
At 30 September 2013
At 30 September 2012
At 30 September 2011
Land and
buildings
£m
20.8
13.1
1.0
14.1
1.1
15.2
5.6
6.7
7.7
The net book value of land and buildings represents buildings held under fi nance leases.
After the year end, on 4 November 2013, the Company acquired the freehold in its head offi ce building, which it had occupied under the
terms of a sale and leaseback agreement. The cash consideration paid was £23.7m and on the completion of the transaction the leasehold
fi xed asset shown above and the related lease creditor, included in fi nancial liabilities at 30 September 2013 at £10.2m (note 49), were
both extinguished.
26.
INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARY UNDERTAKINGS
At 1 October 2011
Investments in subsidiaries
Disposal of subsidiaries
Loans advanced
Loans repaid
Provision movements
At 30 September 2012
Investments in subsidiaries
Disposal of subsidiaries
Loans advanced
Loans repaid
Provision movements
At 30 September 2013
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Shares in
Group
Loans to
Group
Companies
Companies
Loans to
ESOP
Trusts
£m
252.3
-
-
-
-
(116.3)
136.0
61.7
(0.1)
-
-
(3.7)
193.9
£m
490.2
-
-
14.2
(23.9)
-
480.5
-
-
19.3
(23.3)
-
476.5
£m
4.4
-
-
2.1
-
(0.4)
6.1
-
-
4.1
-
(2.4)
7.8
Total
£m
746.9
-
-
16.3
(23.9)
(116.7)
622.6
61.7
(0.1)
23.4
(23.3)
(6.1)
678.2
Investments in and disposals of subsidiaries represent transactions between the Company and various of its subsidiaries.
During the year ended 30 September 2013 the Company received £54.7m in dividend income from its subsidiaries (2012: £164.7m) and
£30.6m of interest on loans to Group companies (2012: £32.3m).
The principal operating subsidiaries, and the nature of the Group’s interest in them, are shown in note 27.
118
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
27. PRINCIPAL OPERATING SUBSIDIARIES
Principal operating subsidiaries where the share capital is held within the Group comprise:
Holding
Principal Activity
Direct subsidiaries of The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
Paragon Finance PLC
Mortgage Trust Limited
Paragon Mortgages Limited
Paragon Mortgages (2010) Limited
Paragon Car Finance Limited
Idem Capital Holdings Limited
Moorgate Servicing Limited
Idem Jersey (No. 1) Limited
SPV Securities Limited
The Business Mortgage Company Limited
Paragon Fourth Funding Limited
Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 8) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 16) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 17) PLC
Paragon Personal and Auto Finance (No. 3) PLC
Paragon Secured Finance (No. 1) PLC
First Flexible (No. 7) PLC
Subsidiary of Paragon Mortgages Limited
Paragon Second Funding Limited
Subsidiaries of Mortgage Trust Limited
Mortgage Trust Services plc
First Flexible No. 6 PLC
Subsidiary of Moorgate Servicing Limited
Redbrick Survey and Valuation Limited
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100% *
100% *
100% *
100% *
100% *
100% *
100% *
100%
100%
100%
100%
Residential mortgages and asset administration
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Vehicle fi nance
Intermediate holding company
Intermediate holding company
Asset investment
Asset investment
Mortgage broker
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Loan and vehicle fi nance
Loan fi nance
100% *
Residential mortgages
100%
Residential mortgages and loan and vehicle fi nance
100%
Residential mortgages and asset administration
100% *
Residential mortgages
100%
Surveyors and property consulting
Direct and indirect subsidiaries of Idem Capital Holdings Limited
Moorgate Loan Servicing Limited
Idem (No. 3) Limited
Idem Capital Securities Limited
Paragon Personal Finance Limited
100%
100%
100%
100%
Asset administration
Asset investment
Asset investment
Consumer loan fi nance
The holdings shown above are those held by the Group. The shareholdings of the Company are the same as those held by the parent company
identifi ed above, except that for the shareholdings marked * the parent company holds only 74% of the share capital, the remainder being held
by other group companies.
The fi nancial year end of all of the Group’s subsidiary companies is 30 September. They are all registered in England and Wales, except
Idem Jersey (No. 1) Limited, which is registered in the Bailiwick of Jersey, and they all operate in the United Kingdom.
The issued share capital of all subsidiaries consists of ordinary share capital, except that First Flexible No. 6 PLC has additional preference
share capital held by the Group.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
119
As part of the Group’s fi nancing arrangements certain mortgage loans originated by Paragon Mortgages (2010) Limited and Mortgage Trust
Limited have been sold to special purpose entity companies, which had raised non-recourse fi nance to fund these purchases. The shares
of these companies are ultimately benefi cially owned by certain charities under charitable trusts and are considered to be controlled by the
Group, as defi ned by SIC-12 ‘Special Purpose Entities’ and hence they are considered to be subsidiaries of the Group.
The principal companies party to these arrangements, which are registered and operate in the United Kingdom comprise:
First Flexible No. 4 plc
First Flexible No. 5 plc
Paragon Fifth Funding Limited
Paragon Mortgages (No. 18) PLC
28.
FINANCIAL ASSETS
(a)
The Group
Loans and receivables
Finance lease receivables
Loans to customers
Fair value adjustments from portfolio hedging
Investments in structured entities
Derivative fi nancial assets
Principal Activity
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Residential mortgages
Note
29
30
31
33
34
35
2013
£m
8,800.2
1.3
8,801.5
-
23.8
890.0
2012
£m
8,692.1
2.5
8,694.6
1.1
9.1
800.4
9,715.3
9,505.2
2011
£m
8,716.7
7.5
8,724.2
3.4
11.8
1,151.8
9,891.2
The Group’s loan assets and investments in structured entities at 30 September 2013, analysed between those assets acquired through its
Idem Capital loan investment operation and those generated through other sources, principally loans advanced on its own account, was
as follows:
First mortgages
Consumer loans
Loans to
customers
Investments in
structured
entities
Total investments
in loans
(b)
The Company
Derivative fi nancial assets
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
2013
Idem
£m
17.5
152.4
2013
Other
£m
8,384.3
247.3
2013
Total
£m
8,401.8
399.7
2012
Idem
£m
19.0
107.3
2012
Other
£m
8,276.6
291.7
2012
Total
£m
8,295.6
399.0
169.9
8,631.6
8,801.5
126.3
8,568.3
8,694.6
23.8
-
23.8
9.1
-
9.1
193.7
8,631.6
8,825.3
135.4
8,568.3
8,703.7
2013
£m
-
-
2012
£m
-
-
2011
£m
4.0
4.0
120
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
29.
LOANS AND RECEIVABLES
Loans and receivables at 30 September 2013, 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011, which are all denominated and payable in
sterling, were:
First mortgage loans
Secured loans
Retail fi nance loans
Other unsecured loans
2013
£m
8,401.8
248.4
1.5
148.5
2012
£m
8,295.6
279.9
2.0
114.6
8,800.2
8,692.1
2011
£m
8,360.4
340.1
2.9
13.3
8,716.7
First mortgages are secured on residential property within the United Kingdom; Secured loans enjoy second charges on residential property.
Retail fi nance loans are unsecured. The estimated value of the security held against those loans above which are considered to be impaired or
past due, representing the lesser of the outstanding balance and the estimated valuation of the property for each such account was:
First mortgage loans
Secured loans
2013
£m
54.4
41.6
96.0
2012
£m
70.7
41.6
112.3
Mortgage loans have a contractual term of up to thirty years, secured loans up to twenty fi ve years, retail fi nance loans up to ten years and
other unsecured loans up to ten years. In all cases the borrower is entitled to settle the loan at any point and in most cases early settlement
does take place. All borrowers are required to make monthly payments, except where an initial deferred period is included in the contractual
terms.
Under the terms of certain fi rst mortgage products, the customer has the right to draw down further funds. At 30 September 2013 the Group’s
commitment in respect of such facilities was £6.7m (2012: £32.3m).
The loans shown above pledged as collateral for the liabilities described in note 48 at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 were:
30 September 2013
In respect of:
Asset backed loan notes
Warehouse facilities
Total pledged as collateral
Not pledged as collateral
30 September 2012
In respect of:
Asset backed loan notes
Warehouse facilities
Total pledged as collateral
Not pledged as collateral
First
Mortgages
£m
Consumer
Finance
£m
6,940.8
1,426.7
8,467.5
34.3
8,401.8
6,674.4
1,582.7
8,257.1
38.5
8,295.6
240.7
-
240.7
157.7
398.4
282.2
-
282.2
114.3
396.5
Total
£m
7,181.5
1,426.7
8,608.2
192.0
8,800.2
6,956.6
1,582.7
8,539.3
152.8
8,692.1
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
121
30.
FINANCE LEASE RECEIVABLES
The Group’s fi nance lease receivables are car fi nance loans. The average contractual life of such loans is 56 months (2012: 56 months), but it
is likely that a signifi cant proportion of customers will choose to settle their obligations early.
The minimum lease payments due under these loan agreements are:
Amounts receivable
Within one year
Within two to fi ve years
After fi ve years
Less: future fi nance income
Present value
2013
£m
0.9
1.2
0.1
2.2
(0.2)
2.0
The present values of those payments, net of provisions for impairment, carried in the accounts are:
Amounts receivable
Within one year
Within two to fi ve years
After fi ve years
Present value
Allowance for uncollectible amounts
Provision for recoveries
Carrying value
2013
£m
0.8
1.1
0.1
2.0
(1.0)
0.3
1.3
2012
£m
1.6
1.7
-
3.3
(0.2)
3.1
2012
£m
1.5
1.6
-
3.1
(1.2)
0.6
2.5
2011
£m
5.2
3.0
0.2
8.4
(0.5)
7.9
2011
£m
4.9
2.8
0.2
7.9
(1.4)
1.0
7.5
The Group considers that the fair value of its fi nance lease receivables is not signifi cantly different to their carrying values. Whilst the Group has
the benefi t of the underlying vehicle as security on these loans, no account of this is taken in the allowance for uncollectible amounts shown
above. The Group has insuffi cient information on the current condition of fi nance leased vehicles to derive a reliable estimate of the value which
could be realised from vehicles to offset against arrears accounts. Accordingly, no such disclosure is provided.
The loans shown above pledged as collateral for liabilities at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 were:
In respect of:
Asset backed loan notes
Warehouse facilities
Total pledged as collateral
Not pledged as collateral
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
2013
£m
1.0
-
1.0
0.3
1.3
2012
£m
1.9
-
1.9
0.6
2.5
122
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
31.
LOANS TO CUSTOMERS
The movements in the Group’s investment in loans to customers in the year ended 30 September 2013 and the year ended
30 September 2012 were:
Cost
At 1 October 2012
Additions
Disposals
Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) adjustments
Other debits
Provision charge (note 32)
Repayments and redemptions
At 30 September 2013
2013
£m
8,694.6
436.3
-
34.5
238.4
(15.2)
(587.1)
2012
£m
8,724.2
310.0
(5.9)
6.7
283.2
(24.1)
(599.5)
8,801.5
8,694.6
‘Other debits’ includes primarily interest and fees charged to customers on loans outstanding.
The fair value of loans to customers is considered to be not materially different to the amortised cost value at which they are disclosed.
Following the year end, on 8 October 2013 the Group acquired a portfolio of non-performing personal secured and unsecured loans from
HSBC Bank plc. The cash paid was £13.5m.
32.
IMPAIRMENT PROVISIONS ON LOANS TO CUSTOMERS
The following amounts in respect of impairment provisions, net of allowances for recoveries of written off assets, have been deducted from
the appropriate assets in the balance sheet.
At 1 October 2011
Charge for the year (note 17)
On assets sold
Amounts written off
Amounts recovered
At 30 September 2012
Charge for the year (note 17)
On assets sold
Amounts written off
Amounts recovered
At 30 September 2013
First
Other loans
Mortgages
and
receivables
Finance
leases
£m
70.7
12.2
-
(6.1)
(0.4)
76.4
6.8
-
(1.4)
(0.1)
81.7
£m
45.2
11.4
(11.6)
(11.4)
(1.8)
31.8
8.3
-
(9.4)
(1.7)
29.0
£m
0.4
0.5
-
-
(0.3)
0.6
0.1
-
-
-
0.7
Total
£m
116.3
24.1
(11.6)
(17.5)
(2.5)
108.8
15.2
-
(10.8)
(1.8)
111.4
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
123
33.
FAIR VALUE ADJUSTMENTS FROM PORTFOLIO HEDGING
The Group applies fair value hedge accounting in respect of portfolios of loan assets where the appropriate criteria are met. In these
circumstances the change in the fair value of the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk is shown under this heading.
34.
INVESTMENT IN STRUCTURED ENTITIES
Investments in structured entities represent the Group’s contribution made to special purpose vehicle (‘SPV’) companies established
and controlled by unrelated third parties to purchase pools of loan assets. All such investments are denominated in sterling, unlisted and
are considered to be debt investments as defi ned by IFRS. The underlying loans are secured and unsecured consumer loans made to
United Kingdom borrowers. The Group is under no obligation to make any further contribution to these entities.
The movements in the Group’s investment in structured entities in the year ended 30 September 2013 and the year ended
30 September 2012 were:
Cost
At 1 October 2012
Additions
Effective Interest Rate (‘EIR’) income (note 9)
Payments received
At 30 September 2013
2013
£m
9.1
21.4
4.1
(10.8)
23.8
2012
£m
11.8
-
5.5
(8.2)
9.1
The fair values of investments in structured entities are considered to be not materially different to the amortised cost value at which they are
disclosed.
The Group administers the assets of the SPV companies on behalf of the owners. Fee income derived from this activity of £4.7m
(2012: £ 1.4m) is included within third party servicing fees (note 11) and £0.7m (2012: £0.1m) is included in other debtors (note 36) in respect
of unpaid fees at the year end.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
124
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
35. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
All of the Group’s fi nancial derivatives are held for economic hedging purposes, although not all may be designated for hedge accounting in
accordance with the provisions of IAS 39. The analysis below therefore splits derivatives between those accounted for as hedges and those
which, while representing an economic hedge, do not qualify for this treatment.
All of the fi nancial derivatives shown are valued using methodologies where the principal inputs are directly or indirectly derived from market
data and are therefore classifi ed within level two of the fair value hierarchy laid down by IFRS 7.
The Group’s securitisation borrowings are denominated in sterling, euros and US dollars. All currency borrowings are swapped at inception
so that they have the effect of sterling borrowings. These swaps provide an effective hedge against exchange rate movements, but the
requirement to carry them at fair value leads, when exchange rates have moved signifi cantly since the issue of the notes, to large balances
for the swaps being carried in the balance sheet. This is currently the case with both euro and US dollar swaps, although the debit balance is
compensated for by retranslating the borrowings at the current exchange rate.
Derivative fi nancial assets and liabilities are included within Financial Assets (note 28) and Financial Liabilities (note 47) respectively.
(a)
The Group
2013
Notional
amount
£m
2013
Assets
2013
Liabilities
£m
£m
2012
Notional
amount
£m
2012
Assets
2012
Liabilities
£m
£m
Derivatives in
accounting
hedge
relationships
Fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps
Cash fl ow hedges
Foreign exchange
basis swaps
Other derivatives
Interest rate swaps
Interest rate caps
Total recognised
derivative assets /
94.7
94.7
4,712.3
4,712.3
4,807.0
269.6
-
269.6
-
-
889.6
889.6
889.6
0.4
-
0.4
(0.2)
(0.2)
-
-
(0.2)
(1.1)
-
(1.1)
119.9
119.9
4,850.5
4,850.5
4,970.4
170.8
4.4
175.2
-
-
799.5
799.5
799.5
0.9
-
0.9
(1.5)
(1.5)
-
-
(1.5)
(3.1)
-
(3.1)
(liabilities)
5,076.6
890.0
(1.3)
5,145.6
800.4
(4.6)
At 30 September 2013 cash deposits of £120.4m had been pledged as collateral in respect of swaps shown above by the respective swap
counterparties (2012: £100.7m) as described in note 6.
All fair value hedging items at 30 September 2012 and at 30 September 2013 relate to the hedging of the Group’s loan assets on a
portfolio basis.
(b)
The Company
The Company had no derivative fi nancial assets or liabilities at either 30 September 2013 or 30 September 2012.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
125
36. OTHER RECEIVABLES
(a)
The Group
Current assets
Accrued interest income
Prepayments
Bank borrowings
Other debtors
Note
48
2013
£m
0.2
2.1
1.7
3.6
7.6
Accrued interest income and other debtors fall within the defi nition of fi nancial assets given in IAS 32.
The fair values of the above items are not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.
(b)
The Company
Current assets
Amounts owed by Group companies
Accrued interest income
2013
£m
115.0
-
115.0
Accrued interest income and other debtors fall within the defi nition of fi nancial assets given in IAS 32.
The fair values of the above items are not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.
2012
£m
0.2
1.7
2.7
2.7
7.3
2012
£m
80.1
-
80.1
2011
£m
0.5
1.0
-
3.2
4.7
2011
£m
79.9
0.1
80.0
37. CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS
Only ‘Free Cash’ is unrestrictedly available for the Group’s general purposes. Cash received in respect of loan assets is not immediately
available, due to the terms of the warehouse facilities and the securitisations. ‘Cash and Cash Equivalents’ also includes balances held by the
Trustees of the Paragon Employee Share Ownership Plans which may only be used to invest in the shares of the Company, pursuant to the
aims of those plans.
The total consolidated ‘Cash and Cash Equivalents’ balance may be analysed as shown below:
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Free cash
Securitisation cash
ESOP cash
2013
£m
170.8
414.1
2.4
587.3
2012
£m
127.7
374.9
2.2
504.8
2011
£m
195.0
374.1
2.5
571.6
All ‘Cash and Cash Equivalents’ shown in the Company balance sheet are included in free cash.
Cash and Cash Equivalents includes current bank balances and fi xed rate sterling term deposits with London banks.
126
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
38. CALLED-UP SHARE CAPITAL
The share capital of the Company consists of a single class of £1 ordinary shares.
Movements in the issued share capital in the year were:
Ordinary shares
At 1 October 2012
Shares issued
At 30 September 2013
2013
Number
2012
Number
301,841,614
4,371,601
299,745,445
2,096,169
306,213,215
301,841,614
During the year the Company issued 3,975,993 shares at par (2012: 2,090,570) to the trustees of its ESOP Trusts in order that they could fulfi l
their obligations under the Group’s share based award arrangements. It also issued 395,608 shares (2012: 5,599) to satisfy options granted
under sharesave schemes for a consideration of £398,281 (2012: £5,688).
39. RESERVES
(a)
The Group
Share premium account
Merger reserve
Cash fl ow hedging reserve
Profi t and loss account
(b)
The Company
Share premium account
Merger reserve
Profi t and loss account
Note
40
41
42
43
Note
40
41
43
2013
£m
64.1
(70.2)
1.7
619.1
614.7
2013
£m
64.1
(23.7)
382.7
423.1
2012
£m
64.1
(70.2)
0.7
555.6
550.2
2012
£m
64.1
(23.7)
333.4
373.8
40. SHARE PREMIUM ACCOUNT
Balance at 1 October 2012
Balance at 30 September 2013
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
64.1
64.1
2012
£m
64.1
64.1
2013
£m
64.1
64.1
2011
£m
64.1
(70.2)
1.8
495.0
490.7
2011
£m
64.1
(23.7)
281.8
322.2
2012
£m
64.1
64.1
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
127
41. MERGER RESERVE
Balance at 1 October 2012
Balance at 30 September 2013
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
(70.2)
(70.2)
2012
£m
(70.2)
(70.2)
2013
£m
(23.7)
(23.7)
2012
£m
(23.7)
(23.7)
The merger reserve arose, due to the provisions of UK company law at the time, on a group restructuring on 12 May 1989 when the Company
became the parent entity of the Group.
42. CASH FLOW HEDGING RESERVE
Note
At 1 October 2012
Movement in fair value of hedging derivatives
Deferred tax thereon
22
At 30 September 2013
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
0.7
1.2
(0.2)
1.7
2012
£m
1.8
(1.5)
0.4
0.7
2013
£m
-
-
-
-
2012
£m
-
-
-
-
The cash fl ows to which these amounts relate are expected to take place, and to affect profi t, over the next 31 years (2012: 32 years). The
majority of the balance relates to the cross currency basis swaps described in note 6. Cash fl ows in respect of these swaps will continue for
as long as the related notes remain outstanding.
Foreign exchange losses of £88.8m on asset backed loan notes denominated in US dollars and euros (2012: gains of £344.9m) have been
taken to the cash fl ow hedging reserve together with equal and opposite movements on the cross currency basis swaps used to hedge
these liabilities.
43. PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT
At 1 October 2012
Dividends paid
Share options exercised
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Charge for share based remuneration
Tax on share based remuneration
Actuarial (loss) on retirement benefi t obligation
Profi t for the year
At 30 September 2013
Note
44
45
13
22
50
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
555.6
(20.7)
(4.8)
3.1
3.4
(2.7)
85.2
619.1
2012
£m
495.0
(12.3)
(2.3)
2.8
0.9
(0.7)
72.2
555.6
2013
£m
333.4
(20.7)
-
3.1
-
-
66.9
382.7
2012
£m
281.8
(12.3)
-
2.8
-
-
61.1
333.4
128
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
44. EQUITY DIVIDEND
Amounts recognised as distributions to equity shareholders in the Group and the Company in the period:
Equity dividends on ordinary shares
Final dividend for the year ended 30 September 2012
Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2013
Amounts paid and proposed in respect of the year:
Interim dividend for the year ended 30 September 2013
Proposed fi nal dividend for the year
ended 30 September 2013
2013
Per share
2012
Per share
4.50p
2.40p
6.90p
2.65p
1.50p
4.15p
2013
Per share
2012
Per share
2.40p
4.80p
7.20p
1.50p
4.50p
6.00p
2013
£m
13.5
7.2
20.7
2013
£m
7.2
14.6
21.8
2012
£m
7.9
4.4
12.3
2012
£m
4.4
13.5
17.9
Dividends of £0.0m (2012: £0.0m) were paid by the Company in respect of shares held by ESOP trusts on which dividends had not
been waived.
The proposed fi nal dividend for the year ended 30 September 2013 will be paid on 10 February 2014, subject to approval at the Annual
General Meeting, with a record date of 10 January 2014. The dividend will be recognised in the accounts when it is paid.
45.
TRANSACTIONS IN SHARES
Awards from ESOP schemes
Proceeds
Cost of shares transferred (note 46)
(Defi cit) on exercise (note 43)
Shares issued
Nominal value (note 38)
Premium on issue (note 40)
Proceeds of issue
(Defi cit) / surplus on transactions in own shares
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
2012
£m
2013
£m
2012
£m
0.6
(5.4)
(4.8)
4.4
-
4.4
(0.4)
0.2
(2.5)
(2.3)
2.1
-
2.1
(0.2)
-
-
-
4.4
-
4.4
4.4
-
-
-
2.1
-
2.1
2.1
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
129
46. OWN SHARES
Treasury shares
At 1 October 2012
Shares purchased
At 30 September 2013
ESOP shares
At 1 October 2012
Shares purchased
Shares subscribed for (note 38)
Options exercised (note 45)
At 30 September 2013
Balance at 30 September 2013
Balance at 1 October 2012
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
39.5
-
39.5
9.0
0.5
4.0
(5.4)
8.1
47.6
48.5
2012
£m
39.5
-
39.5
8.9
0.5
2.1
(2.5)
9.0
48.5
48.4
2013
£m
39.5
-
39.5
-
-
-
-
-
39.5
39.5
2012
£m
39.5
-
39.5
-
-
-
-
-
39.5
39.5
At 30 September 2013 the number of the Company’s own shares held in treasury was 668,900 (2012: 668,900). These shares had a nominal
value of £668,900 (2012: £668,900). The dividends on these shares have been waived.
The ESOP shares are held in trust for the benefi t of employees exercising their options under the Company’s share option schemes and
awards under the Paragon Performance Share Plan, Matching Share Plan and Deferred Bonus Scheme. The trustees’ costs are included in
the operating expenses of the Group.
At 30 September 2013, the trusts held 1,931,890 ordinary shares (2012: 2,397,557) with a nominal value of £1,931,890 (2012: £2,397,557)
and a market value of £6,027,497 (2012: £5,010,894). Options, or other share-based awards, were outstanding against 1,931,890 of these
shares at 30 September 2013 (2012: 2,397,557). The dividends on 1,530,185 of these shares have been waived (2012: 1,988,482).
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
130
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
47.
FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
(a)
The Group
Current liabilities
Finance lease liability
Bank loans and overdrafts
Non-current liabilities
Asset backed loan notes
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Finance lease liability
Bank loans and overdrafts
Derivative fi nancial instruments
Note
49
49
35
2013
£m
1.6
1.4
3.0
7,893.2
110.0
59.1
8.6
1,311.2
1.3
2012
£m
1.4
0.6
2.0
7,580.9
110.0
-
10.2
1,453.3
4.6
9,383.4
9,159.0
2011
£m
1.2
0.6
1.8
8,049.7
112.0
-
11.6
1,492.1
9.1
9,674.5
A maturity analysis of the above borrowings and further details of asset backed loan notes, bank loans, corporate and retail bonds are given
in note 48.
(b)
The Company
Current liabilities
Finance lease liability
Non-current liabilities
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Finance lease liability
Note
2013
£m
2012
£m
2011
£m
49
1.6
1.4
1.2
49
110.0
59.1
8.6
177.7
110.0
-
10.2
120.2
112.0
-
11.6
123.6
A maturity analysis of the above borrowings and further details of corporate and retail bonds are given in note 48.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
131
48. BORROWINGS
Set out below is the contractual maturity profi le of the Group’s borrowings at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012:
Financial liabilities falling due:
In one year or
In more than one
In more than two
In more than
Total
less, or on
year, but not
years, but not
fi ve years
30 September 2013
Bank overdrafts
Bank loans
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Asset backed loan notes
30 September 2012
Bank overdrafts
Bank loans
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Asset backed loan notes
demand
£m
1.4
-
-
-
-
1.4
0.6
-
-
-
-
0.6
more than
two years
£m
more than
fi ve years
£m
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
14.0
110.0
-
-
124.0
-
121.0
110.0
-
-
231.0
£m
£m
-
1,297.2
-
59.1
7,893.2
1.4
1,311.2
110.0
59.1
7,893.2
9,249.5
9,374.9
-
1,332.3
-
-
7,580.9
0.6
1,453.3
110.0
-
7,580.9
8,913.2
9,144.8
The fair values of borrowings are not considered to be signifi cantly different to their carrying values and the effective interest rates are not
materially different to the rates charged.
(a)
Asset Backed Loan Notes
The asset backed loan notes are secured on portfolios comprising variable and fi xed rate mortgages or personal, retail and car loans, and are
redeemable in part from time to time, but such redemptions are limited to the net capital received from borrowers in respect of the underlying
assets. There is no requirement for the Group to make good any shortfall out of general funds. The maturity date of the notes matches the
maturity date of the underlying assets. It is likely that a substantial proportion of these notes will be repaid within fi ve years.
In each issue there exists an option for the Group to repay all of the notes at an earlier date (the ‘call date’), at the outstanding principal amount.
Interest is payable at a fi xed margin above;
•
•
•
the London Interbank Offered Rate (‘LIBOR’) on notes denominated in sterling;
the Euro Interbank Offered Rate (‘EURIBOR’) on notes denominated in euros; and
the London Interbank Offered Rate (‘US Dollar LIBOR’) on notes denominated in US dollars.
All payments in respect of the notes are required to be made in the currency in which they are denominated.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
The notes outstanding at 30 September 2013 comprised £7,641.9m (2012: £7,283.8m, 2011: £7,681.7m) in respect of mortgage backed
notes and £251.3m (2012: £297.1m, 2011: £368.0m) in respect of notes backed by other loan assets. The details of the assets backing these
securities are given in notes 29 and 30.
The Group publishes detailed information on the performance of all of its note issues on the Bond Investor Reporting section of its website at
www.paragon-group.co.uk. A more detailed description of the securitisation structure under which these notes are issued is given in note 6.
132
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
On 25 October 2012 a Group company, Paragon Mortgages (No. 17) PLC, issued £195.5m of sterling mortgage backed fl oating rate notes at
par. £175.0m of the notes were rated AAA, £10.5m rated AA and £10.0m rated A. The Group retained £4.5m of subordinated notes and also
invested £6.0m in the fi rst loss fund, bringing its total investment to £10.5m, or 5.25% of the issue amount.
On 23 September 2013 a Group company, Paragon Mortgages (No. 18) PLC, issued £267.5m of sterling mortgage backed fl oating rate notes
at par. £238.1m of the notes were rated AAA, £15.7m rated AA and £13.7m rated A. The Group retained £5.5m of subordinated notes and
also invested £8.2m in the fi rst loss fund, bringing its total investment to £13.7m, or 5.00% of the issue amount.
Notes in issue at 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012, net of any held by the Group, were:
Issuer
Sterling notes
Maturity Call date
date
Principal
outstanding
Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 8) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 16) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 17) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 18) PLC
First Flexible No. 4 PLC
First Flexible No. 5 PLC
First Flexible No. 6 PLC
First Flexible No. 7 PLC
Paragon Personal and Auto
Finance (No. 3) PLC
Paragon Secured Finance
(No. 1) PLC
15/05/43 15/05/08
15/04/44 15/10/08
15/05/41 15/05/09
15/06/41 15/12/09
15/10/41 15/04/10
15/11/38 15/08/10
15/01/39 15/10/10
15/09/39 15/03/11
15/12/39 15/06/11
15/04/39 15/10/14
18/04/40 15/01/16
15/03/41 15/12/16
01/07/36 01/07/08
01/06/34 01/07/09
01/12/35 01/03/08
15/09/33 15/03/11
15/04/36 15/04/09
15/11/35 15/11/08
US dollar notes
Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC
First Flexible No. 6 PLC
15/05/43 15/05/08
15/05/41 15/05/09
15/06/41 15/12/09
15/10/41 15/04/10
15/11/38 15/08/10
15/01/39 15/10/10
15/09/39 15/03/11
15/12/39 15/06/11
01/12/35 01/03/08
Euro notes
Paragon Mortgages (No. 7) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 8) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 9) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 10) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 11) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 12) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 13) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 14) PLC
Paragon Mortgages (No. 15) PLC
First Flexible No. 6 PLC
Paragon Personal and
Auto Finance (No. 3) PLC
15/05/43 15/05/08
15/04/44 15/10/08
15/05/41 15/05/09
15/06/41 15/12/09
15/10/41 15/04/10
15/11/38 15/08/10
15/01/39 15/10/10
15/09/39 15/03/11
15/12/39 15/06/11
01/12/35 01/03/08
15/04/36 15/04/09
2013
£m
81.6
220.3
137.4
179.8
87.0
126.4
144.3
129.4
176.6
120.5
193.4
267.5
72.5
78.3
71.6
56.2
62.7
95.1
$m
235.7
22.4
163.1
468.1
1,053.7
1,113.7
1,285.6
876.1
11.1
€m
239.7
295.6
213.3
264.6
274.3
374.6
354.6
390.7
279.8
40.6
108.1
2012
£m
83.6
226.8
142.3
181.3
89.5
129.2
146.5
131.6
181.6
130.1
-
-
74.7
83.8
74.2
74.2
75.0
112.5
$m
241.6
23.2
176.3
484.4
1,089.3
1,147.6
1,324.6
903.3
11.5
€m
245.6
304.3
220.9
265.5
277.9
379.4
360.4
395.8
282.4
42.1
129.3
Average interest
margin
2013
%
2012
%
0.42
0.59
0.38
0.56
0.28
0.38
0.35
0.30
0.29
2.75
1.46
1.25
1.11
0.99
1.27
0.25
0.95
1.06
%
0.74
0.36
0.09
0.10
0.24
0.23
0.20
0.19
0.56
%
0.66
0.48
0.56
0.41
0.52
0.51
0.40
0.43
0.67
1.05
0.84
0.42
0.59
0.38
0.56
0.28
0.38
0.35
0.29
0.29
2.75
-
-
1.10
0.99
1.27
0.25
0.95
0.98
%
0.74
0.36
0.09
0.10
0.24
0.23
0.20
0.19
0.56
%
0.66
0.48
0.56
0.41
0.52
0.51
0.39
0.43
0.67
1.05
0.84
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
133
(b)
Bank borrowings
Assets are typically securitised within twelve months of origination. Before securitisation new loans are fi nanced by a bank loan, referred to as
a ‘warehouse facility’ These are generally drawn down to fund completions and repaid when assets are securitised. More information on this
process is given in note 6 and details of assets held within the warehouse facilities are given in note 29. Details of the Group’s bank borrowings
are given below.
Principal
value
£m
2013
Maximum
available
facility
£m
Carrying
value
Principal
value
£m
£m
2012
Maximum
available
facility
£m
Carrying
value
£m
i) Paragon
Second Funding
ii) Paragon
Fourth Funding
iii) Paragon
Fifth Funding
iv) Redraw facilities
1,296.2
1,296.2
1,296.2
1,332.3
1,332.3
1,332.3
15.0
-
1.0
250.0
200.0
49.2
14.0
(1.7)
1.0
121.0
-
-
200.0
200.0
63.6
121.0
(2.7)
-
1,312.2
1,795.4
1,309.5
1,453.3
1,795.9
1,450.6
i) The Paragon Second Funding warehouse was available for further drawings until 29 February 2008 at which point it converted automatically
to a term loan and no further drawings were allowed. This loan is a committed sterling facility provided to Paragon Second Funding Limited
by a consortium of banks and is secured on all the assets of Paragon Second Funding Limited, Paragon Car Finance (No. 1) Limited and
Paragon Personal Finance (No. 1) Limited. Its fi nal repayment date is 28 February 2050 but it is likely that substantial repayments will be
made within the next fi ve years. Interest on this loan is payable monthly in sterling at 0.675% above LIBOR (2012: 0.675% above LIBOR).
Repayments of this facility before the fi nal repayment date are restricted to the amount of principal cash realised from the funded assets.
ii) On 27 September 2010 the Group entered into a £200.0m committed sterling facility provided to Paragon Fourth Funding Limited by
Macquarie Bank plc to provide funding for new lending. This facility is secured on all the assets of Paragon Fourth Funding Limited and
is available for drawing for a period of two years and has a term of four years. Loans originated in this warehouse are refi nanced in the
mortgage backed securitisation market from time to time when appropriate. Interest on this loan is payable monthly in sterling at 2.875%
above LIBOR. The facility was renewed on substantially the same terms with an increased commitment of £250.0m, for a further two year
period on 2 November 2012 and has a renewal process that allows the Group to agree a new two year commitment period prior to the
expiry of the existing commitment period. Repayments on this facility are limited to principal cash received from the funded assets.
iii) To provide further funding for new lending, on 26 September 2012, the Group entered into a £200.0m committed sterling facility provided
to Paragon Fifth Funding Limited by the wholesale division of Lloyds Bank. This facility is secured on all the assets of Paragon Fifth Funding
Limited and is structured with a three year term to permit drawings and re-drawings in its fi rst 24 months. Loans originated in this warehouse
are refi nanced in the mortgage backed securitisation market from time to time when appropriate. Interest on this loan is payable monthly in
sterling at 2.75% above three month LIBOR. The facility has a renewal process that allows the Group to agree a new commitment period
prior to the expiry of the existing commitment period. As with the other warehouses, repayments on this facility are limited to principal cash
received from the funded assets. At 30 September 2013 and 30 September 2012 no amounts were drawn on this facility, although it had
been used in the intervening period, therefore unamortised debit EIR adjustments are included in other receivables (note 36).
iv) In addition, certain subsidiary SPV companies of the Group have entered into sterling revolving credit facilities to fund mortgage redraws,
where the SPV would otherwise have insuffi cient principal cash to meet these obligations. Interest on these loans is payable monthly or
quarterly, on the same days as for the SPV’s Note borrowings, in sterling at 0.30% above the LIBOR applicable to the Note borrowings. The
drawings are repayable out of the principal cash received from the SPV assets in preference to all other creditors of the SPV with no further
recourse to other Group companies. The facilities are each effectively secured on all of the assets of the SPV concerned.
The weighted average margin above LIBOR on bank borrowings at 30 September 2013 was 0.700% (2012: 0.858%).
(c)
Corporate bond
On 20 April 2005 the Company issued £120.0m of 7% Callable Subordinated Notes at an issue price of 99.347% to provide long term capital
for the Group. These bonds bore interest at a fi xed rate of 7% per annum until 20 April 2012, after which interest was payable at a fi xed rate of
3.729% per annum. The bonds are repayable on 20 April 2017. They are unsecured and subordinated to any other creditors of the Company.
At 30 September 2013 £110.0m (2012: £110.0m, 2011: £112.0m) was included within the fi nancial liabilities of the Company and the Group
in respect of these bonds.
134
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
(d)
Retail bonds
On 11 February 2013 the Company inaugurated a £1,000.0m Euro Medium Term Note Programme under which it may issue retail bonds, or
other notes, within a twelve month period. The terms of issue for each tranche of notes are separately determined. These bonds are listed on
the London Stock Exchange and have a fi xed term, but are callable at the option of the Company. A summary of the retail bonds outstanding
under this programme is given below.
Maturity date
Interest terms
Issue price
Currency
5 December 2020
6.00% p.a. fi xed
par
GBP
2013
£m
60.0
60.0
2012
£m
-
-
The notes are unsubordinated unsecured liabilities of the Company and the amount included in Financial Liabilities in the accounts of the Group
and the Company in respect of these bonds is £59.1m (2012: £nil).
49. OBLIGATIONS UNDER FINANCE LEASES
The fi nance lease obligations recorded in the accounts arise from a sale and leaseback transaction of one of the Group’s offi ce buildings in
1997 which falls to be treated as a fi nance lease under IAS 17 - ‘Leases’. The lease was due to expire in 2019 and was subject to fi ve yearly
rent reviews, with guaranteed minimum rent increases.
After the year end the freehold of the property was reacquired by the Company and the liability was extinguished (note 25).
The minimum lease payments payable under this lease were:
Amounts payable
Within one year
Within two to fi ve years
After fi ve years
Less: future fi nance charges
Present value of lease obligations
The present value of these payments recognised in the fi nancial statements is:
Amounts payable
Within one year
Within two to fi ve years
After fi ve years
2013
£m
2.4
9.6
0.6
12.6
(2.4)
10.2
2013
£m
1.6
8.0
0.6
10.2
2012
£m
2.3
9.6
3.0
14.9
(3.3)
11.6
2012
£m
1.4
7.4
2.8
11.6
2011
£m
2.2
9.5
5.4
17.1
(4.3)
12.8
2011
£m
1.2
6.7
4.9
12.8
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
The fair value of the lease obligation is not considered to be materially different to the present value of the future obligations shown above. The
interest rate implicit in the lease is 7.99% (2012: 7.99%).
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
135
50. RETIREMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS
The Group operates a funded defi ned benefi t pension scheme in the UK (the ‘Plan’). A full actuarial valuation was carried out at 31 March 2013
and updated to 30 September 2013 by a qualifi ed independent actuary.
The liabilities of the Plan are measured by discounting the best estimate of future cash fl ows to be paid out by the scheme using the Projected
Unit method. This amount is refl ected in the liability in the balance sheet. The Projected Unit method is an accrued benefi ts valuation method
in which the technical provisions are calculated based on service up until the valuation date allowing for future salary growth until the date of
retirement, withdrawal or death, as appropriate. The future service rate is then calculated as the contribution rate required to fund the service
accruing over the control period again allowing for future salary growth. As a result of the Plan being closed to new entrants, the service cost
as a percentage of pensionable salaries is expected to increase as the members of the Plan approach retirement. However the membership
is expected to reduce so that the service charge in monetary terms will gradually reduce. The major weighted average assumptions used by
the actuary were (in nominal terms):
30 September
2013
30 September
30 September
2012
2011
In determining net pension cost for the year
Discount rate
Expected long term rate of return on scheme assets
Rate of compensation increase
Rate of price infl ation
Rate of increase of pensions
In determining benefi t obligations
Discount rate
Rate of compensation increase
Rate of price infl ation
Rate of increase of pensions
Further life expectancy at age 60
Male member aged 60
Female member aged 60
Male member aged 40
Female member aged 40
4.60%
5.10%
3.65%
2.65%
2.55%
4.50%
3.80%
3.30%
3.20%
29
31
31
33
5.25%
5.90%
4.10%
3.10%
3.00%
4.60%
3.65%
2.65%
2.55%
30
32
32
34
5.20%
6.30%
4.00%
3.00%
3.00%
5.25%
4.10%
3.10%
3.00%
30
32
32
34
The assets in the Plan at 30 September 2013, 30 September 2012 and 30 September 2011 and the expected rates of return were:
At 30 September 2013
Long
term rate
of return
expected
Value
£m
6.80%
4.10%
5.40%
5.90%
Equities
Bonds
Other
Total market
value of assets
Present value of
scheme liabilities
(Defi cit) in the
scheme
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
50.3
22.6
6.5
79.4
(95.1)
(15.7)
At 30 September 2012
At 30 September 2011
Long
term rate
of return
expected
6.05%
3.60%
4.60%
5.10%
Long
term rate
of return
expected
6.75%
4.65%
5.30%
5.90%
Value
£m
40.7
22.5
6.1
69.3
(83.2)
(13.9)
Value
£m
34.0
19.3
5.8
59.1
(73.5)
(14.4)
The Plan assets are held in a separate fund, administered by a corporate trustee, to meet long-term pension liabilities to past and present
employees. The Trustee of the Plan is required to act in the best interests of the Plan’s benefi ciaries. The appointment of directors to the Trustee
is determined by the scheme’s trust documentation. The Group has a policy that one third of all directors of the Trustee should be nominated
by active and pensioner members of the Plan.
At 30 September 2013 the Plan assets were invested in a diversifi ed portfolio that consisted primarily of equity and gilt investments. The
majority of the equities held by the Plan are in developed markets. The target asset allocations for the year ending 30 September 2014 are
50% equities, 30% bonds and 20% other assets.
136
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
In conjunction with the Trustee, the Group has continued to conduct asset-liability reviews of the Plan. These studies are used to assist the
Trustee and the Group to determine the optimal long-term asset allocation with regard to the structure of liabilities within the Plan. The results
of the studies are used to assist the Trustee in managing the volatility in the underlying investment performance and risk of a signifi cant increase
in the scheme defi cit by providing information used to determine the investment strategy of the Plan.
Following the 2013 actuarial valuation, the Trustee put in place a recovery plan. The Trustee’s recovery plan aims to meet the statutory funding
objective within six years and fi ve months from the date of valuation, i.e. by 31 August 2019.
The rate of return expected on scheme assets is based on the current level of expected returns on risk free investments (primarily government
bonds), the historical level of the risk premium associated with other asset classes in which the portfolio is invested and the expectations for
future returns of each asset class. The expected return for each asset class was then weighted based on the asset allocation to develop the
expected long-term rate of return on assets assumption for the portfolio.
The movement in the market value of the scheme assets during the year were as follows:
At 1 October 2012
Movement in year
Contributions by the Group
Contributions by scheme members
Benefi ts paid
Expected return on scheme assets
Actuarial gain
At 30 September 2013
The actual return on scheme assets in the year ended 30 September 2013 was £8.2m (2012: £8.0m).
The movement in the present value of the scheme liabilities during the year was as follows:
At 1 October 2012
Movement in year
Current service cost
Past service costs
Contributions by scheme members
Plan curtailments
Benefi ts paid
Finance cost
Actuarial loss
At 30 September 2013
2013
£m
69.3
2.9
0.3
(1.3)
3.6
4.6
79.4
2013
£m
83.2
1.7
-
0.3
-
(1.3)
3.8
7.4
2012
£m
59.1
2.9
0.3
(0.9)
3.5
4.4
69.3
2012
£m
73.5
1.5
-
0.3
-
(0.9)
3.9
4.9
95.1
83.2
The most recent valuation of the scheme liabilities on a buy-out basis obtained by the Trustee in accordance with section 224 of the Pensions
Act 2004 was calculated at 31 March 2013, when the valuation on that basis was £144.5m.
The sensitivity of the valuation of the scheme liabilities to the principal assumptions disclosed above at 30 September 2013 is as follows:
Assumption
Discount rate
Rate of infl ation *
Rate of salary growth
Rates of mortality
* maintaining a 1% real increase in salary growth
Increase in
assumption
0.1% p.a.
0.1% p.a.
0.1% p.a.
1 year of life expectancy
Impact on scheme
liabilities
2.2% decrease
0.4% increase
1.9% increase
2.0% increase
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
137
The duration of the scheme’s liabilities are shown in the table below:
Category of member
Active members
Deferred pensioners
Current pensioners
All members
2013
Years
2012
Years
24
25
15
23
27
28
14
27
With effect from 27 June 2011 the agreed rate of employer contributions was 26.6% of gross salaries for participating employees, following
the fi nalisation of the 31 March 2010 actuarial valuation. Since 1 April 2010 an additional contribution of £1.5m per annum has been paid by
monthly instalments. From 8 October 2013, following the fi nalisation of the March 2013 valuation, contributions rose to 27.0% of gross salaries
for participating employees, the £1.5m contribution remained in place and a further additional contribution of £0.4m to cover administration
and life cover was agreed.
The present best estimate of the contributions to be made to the plan by the Group in the year ending 30 September 2014 is £3.3m.
The amounts charged in the income statement in respect of the pension scheme are:
Current service cost
Past service cost
Plan curtailments
Included within operating expenses
Expected return on scheme assets
Funding cost of scheme liability
Total expense recognised in profi t
Note
13
9
10
2013
£m
1.7
-
-
1.7
(3.6)
3.8
1.9
The actuarial losses and gains in the statement of comprehensive income in respect of the pension scheme are:
Gain on scheme assets
(Loss) on scheme liabilities
Total actuarial (loss)
Tax thereon
Net actuarial (loss)
Note
22
43
2013
£m
4.6
(7.4)
(2.8)
0.1
(2.7)
2012
£m
1.5
-
-
1.5
(3.5)
3.9
1.9
2012
£m
4.4
(4.9)
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.7)
The tax shown above is disproportionate to the actuarial losses recorded in the periods due to the effect on deferred tax of the changes in tax
rate described in note 19.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
138
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
The cumulative value of actuarial losses charged through reserves to the profi t and loss account since 1 October 2001, the fi rst date on which
a valuation of the scheme assets and liabilities on a basis consistent with IAS 19 was carried out is £37.0m (2012: £34.2m):
The fi ve year history of experience adjustments on the scheme is as shown below:
Fair value of scheme assets
Present value of
scheme obligations
(Defi cit) in the scheme
Experience adjustments
on scheme assets:
Amount (£m)
Percentage of scheme assets
Experience adjustments
on scheme liabilities:
Amount (£m)
Percentage of scheme liabilities
2013
£m
79.4
(95.1)
(15.7)
4.6
5.8%
(0.2)
(0.3)%
2012
£m
69.3
(83.2)
(13.9)
4.4
6.4%
(0.1)
(0.1)%
2011
£m
59.1
(73.5)
(14.4)
(4.4)
(7.5)%
2.8
3.8%
2010
£m
57.2
(73.7)
(16.5)
0.4
0.6%
-
0.0%
2009
£m
52.0
(63.5)
(11.5)
2.8
5.3%
-
0.0%
In addition to the Group Pension Scheme, the Group operates a defi ned contribution (Stakeholder) pension scheme. Contributions made by
the Group to this scheme in the year ended 30 September 2013 were £0.3m (2012: £0.2m) (note 13).
51. DEFERRED TAX
(a)
The Group
The movements in the net deferred tax liability are as follows:
Net liability / (asset) at 1 October 2012
Income statement charge
Charge / (credit) to equity
Net liability at 30 September 2013
Note
19
22
The net deferred tax liability for which provision has been made is analysed as follows:
Accelerated tax depreciation
Retirement benefi t obligations
Impairment and other provisions
Tax losses
Other timing differences
Net deferred tax liability
2013
£m
7.6
1.9
0.4
9.9
2013
£m
(0.7)
(3.2)
14.6
(0.6)
(0.2)
9.9
2012
£m
5.0
3.7
(1.1)
7.6
2012
£m
(0.8)
(3.2)
16.5
(3.3)
(1.6)
7.6
2011
£m
(1.5)
6.3
0.2
5.0
2011
£m
(1.0)
(3.6)
16.2
(6.6)
-
5.0
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
139
(b)
The Company
The movements in the net deferred tax liability are as follows:
Net liability at 1 October 2012
Income statement charge
Net liability at 30 September 2013
The net deferred tax liability for which provision has been made is analysed as follows:
Other timing differences
Net deferred tax liability
52. CURRENT TAX LIABILITIES
(a)
The Group
UK Corporation Tax
(b)
The Company
UK Corporation Tax
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
2013
£m
-
1.8
1.8
2013
£m
1.8
1.8
2013
£m
5.9
5.9
2013
£m
4.8
4.8
2012
£m
-
-
-
2012
£m
-
-
2012
£m
13.3
13.3
2012
£m
4.4
4.4
2011
£m
-
-
-
2011
£m
-
-
2011
£m
10.7
10.7
2011
£m
3.3
3.3
140
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
53. OTHER LIABILITIES
(a)
The Group
Current liabilities
Accrued interest
Deferred income
Other accruals
Other taxation and social security
Non-current liabilities
Deferred income
Other accruals
2013
£m
20.0
0.2
13.2
2.8
36.2
0.9
-
0.9
2012
£m
23.4
0.3
11.8
1.2
36.7
1.1
-
1.1
2011
£m
25.4
0.3
11.7
0.9
38.3
1.4
0.1
1.5
Accrued interest and other accruals fall within the defi nition of ‘other fi nancial liabilities’ set out in IAS 32 and IAS 39 and their fair values are
not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.
(b)
The Company
Current liabilities
Amounts owed to Group companies
Accrued interest
Deferred income
Non-current liabilities
Deferred income
2013
£m
74.2
2.1
0.1
76.4
0.6
0.6
2012
£m
69.2
1.8
0.1
71.1
0.7
0.7
2011
£m
312.9
3.5
0.1
316.5
0.8
0.8
Accrued interest and other accruals fall within the defi nition of ‘other fi nancial liabilities’ set out in IAS 32 and IAS 39 and their fair values are
not considered to be materially different to their carrying values.
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
141
54. NET CASH FLOW FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
(a)
The Group
Profi t before tax
Non-cash items included in profi t and other adjustments:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation of intangible assets
Foreign exchange movement on borrowings
Other non-cash movements on borrowings
Impairment losses on loans to customers
Charge for share based remuneration
Net decrease / (increase) in operating assets:
Loans to customers
Derivative fi nancial instruments
Fair value of portfolio hedges
Other receivables
Net (decrease) in operating liabilities:
Derivative fi nancial instruments
Other liabilities
Cash (utilised) / generated by operations
Income taxes (paid)
(b)
The Company
Profi t before tax
Non-cash items included in profi t and other adjustments:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Non-cash movements on borrowings
Impairment losses on investments in subsidiaries
Charge for share based remuneration
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Net (increase) / decrease in operating assets:
Other receivables
Derivative fi nancial instruments
Net increase / (decrease) in operating liabilities:
Other liabilities
Cash generated / (utilised) by operations
Income taxes (paid)
2013
£m
105.4
2.1
1.2
88.8
5.9
15.2
3.1
(136.8)
(89.6)
1.1
(1.3)
(3.3)
(1.7)
(9.9)
(22.0)
(31.9)
2013
£m
73.5
1.1
0.1
6.1
3.1
(34.9)
-
5.2
54.2
(4.4)
49.8
2012
£m
95.5
2.1
1.0
(344.9)
(0.7)
24.1
2.8
8.2
351.4
2.3
-
(4.5)
(3.0)
134.3
(17.0)
117.3
2012
£m
65.4
1.0
(2.0)
116.7
2.8
(0.1)
4.0
(245.5)
(57.7)
(3.2)
(60.9)
142
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
55. NET CASH FLOW FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES
Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Purchases of intangible assets
Movement in loans to subsidiary undertakings
Investment in subsidiary undertakings
Disposal of subsidiary undertakings
Net cash (utilised) / generated by investing activities
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
-
(1.0)
(0.6)
-
-
-
(1.6)
2012
£m
0.2
(1.6)
(0.8)
-
-
-
(2.2)
2013
£m
-
-
-
(0.1)
(61.7)
0.1
(61.7)
56. NET CASH FLOW FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES
Shares issued (note 38)
Dividends paid (note 44)
Issue of asset backed fl oating rate notes
Repayment of asset backed fl oating rate notes
Issue of retail bonds
Capital element of fi nance lease payments
Movement on bank facilities
Purchase of shares (note 46)
Sale of shares (note 45)
Net cash generated / (utilised) by fi nancing activities
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
0.4
(20.7)
459.1
(237.5)
59.0
(1.4)
(143.8)
(0.5)
0.6
115.2
2012
£m
-
(12.3)
129.9
(254.9)
-
(1.2)
(43.1)
(0.5)
0.2
(181.9)
2013
£m
4.4
(20.7)
-
-
59.0
(1.4)
-
-
-
41.3
2012
£m
-
-
-
7.6
-
-
7.6
2012
£m
2.1
(12.3)
-
-
-
(1.2)
-
-
-
(11.4)
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
143
57. RECONCILIATION OF NET DEBT
This disclosure is provided in response to the work of the Financial Reporting Council’s Financial Reporting Lab, published in the year. The
disclosure is provided for the Group only, as it is not considered that a separate disclosure for the Company would be useful to users.
Opening
debt
Debt
issued
Other
cash fl ows
Foreign
exchange
£m
£m
£m
£m
Other
non-cash
changes
£m
30 September 2013
Asset backed
loan notes
Bank borrowings
Bank borrowing
debits
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Bank overdrafts
Finance leases
Gross debt
Cash
Net debt
30 September 2012
Asset backed
loan notes
Bank borrowings
Bank borrowing
debits
Corporate bond
Retail bonds
Bank overdrafts
Finance leases
Gross debt
Cash
Net debt
7,580.9
1,453.3
(2.7)
110.0
-
0.6
11.6
9,153.7
(504.8)
8,648.9
8,049.7
1,492.1
-
112.0
-
0.6
12.8
9,667.2
(571.6)
9,095.6
459.1
-
-
-
59.0
-
-
518.1
(518.1)
-
129.9
-
-
-
-
-
-
129.9
(129.9)
-
(237.5)
(143.8)
-
-
-
0.8
(1.4)
(381.9)
435.6
53.7
(254.9)
(40.5)
(2.7)
-
-
-
(1.2)
(299.3)
196.7
(102.6)
88.8
-
-
-
-
-
-
88.8
-
88.8
(344.9)
-
-
-
-
-
-
(344.9)
-
(344.9)
1.9
1.7
1.0
-
0.1
-
-
4.7
-
4.7
1.1
1.7
-
(2.0)
-
-
-
0.8
-
0.8
Closing
debt
£m
7,893.2
1,311.2
(1.7)
110.0
59.1
1.4
10.2
9,383.4
(587.3)
8,796.1
7,580.9
1,453.3
(2.7)
110.0
-
0.6
11.6
9,153.7
(504.8)
8,648.9
58. OPERATING LEASE ARRANGEMENTS
(a)
As lessee
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Minimum lease payments under operating leases
recognised in income for the year
Offi ce buildings
Motor vehicles
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
1.7
0.3
2.0
2012
£m
2.3
0.3
2.6
2013
£m
2012
£m
-
-
-
-
-
-
144
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
At 30 September 2013 the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases,
which fall due as follows:
Amounts falling due:
Within one year
Between two and fi ve years
After more than fi ve years
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
1.8
4.6
-
6.4
2012
£m
2.5
5.6
0.8
8.9
2013
£m
2012
£m
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Operating lease payments represent rents payable by the Group in respect of certain of its offi ce premises and lease payments on company
vehicles. The average term of the current building leases is 10 years (2012: 11 years) with rents subject to review every fi ve years, while the
average term of the vehicle leases is 3 years (2012: 3 years).
(b)
As lessor
Certain of the Group’s offi ce premises which were not required by the Group were sub-let. Rental income from these premises during the year
ended 30 September 2013 was:
Rental income
The Group
The Company
2013
£m
-
2012
£m
0.3
2013
£m
-
2012
£m
0.3
At 30 September 2013 and at 30 September 2012 the Group had received no outstanding commitments from tenants for future minimum
lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases.
59. RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
(a)
The Group
On 27 May 2010, Mr A K Fletcher, an independent non-executive director of the Company, was appointed as a trustee of the Group Pension
Plan, and during the year became a director of its Corporate Trustee when that was put in place. In respect of this appointment he was paid
£10,000 in the year ended 30 September 2013 by Paragon Finance plc, the sponsoring company of the Plan (2012: £10,000).
The Group Pension Plan is a related party of the Group. Transactions with the plan are described in note 50.
The Group had no other transactions with related parties other than the key management compensation disclosed in note 14.
(b)
The Company
During the year the parent company entered into transactions with its subsidiaries, which are related parties. Management services
were provided to the Company by one of its subsidiaries and the Company granted awards under the share based payment arrangements
described in note 15 to employees of subsidiary undertakings. The Company also issued shares to the trustees of its ESOP trusts, as
described in note 38.
Details of the Company’s investments in subsidiaries and the income derived from them are shown in notes 26 and 27.
Outstanding current account balances with subsidiaries are shown in notes 36 and 53.
During the year the Company incurred interest costs of £2.2m in respect of borrowings from its subsidiaries (2012: £9.7m).
s
t
n
u
o
c
c
a
e
h
T
D
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
145
E. Appendices to the Annual Report
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
147
t
r
o
p
e
R
l
a
u
n
n
A
e
h
t
o
t
i
s
e
c
d
n
e
p
p
A
E
E. Appendices to the Annual Report
For the year ended 30 September 2013
A.
COST:INCOME RATIO
Cost:income ratio is derived as follows:
Cost – operating expenses
Total operating income
Cost / Income
2013
£m
58.6
177.9
2012
£m
51.9
170.2
32.9%
30.5%
The adjusted cost income ratio is calculated by excluding certain fi nancing and operating costs relating to activities not yet contributing to
income, and other costs not relating to operations.
Operating expenses
Increase in share based payment charge
Increase in National Insurance on share based payments
Costs of developing banking subsidiary
Adjusted cost
Total operating income
Retail bond cost
Warehouse costs prior to fi rst drawing
Adjusted income
Adjusted cost / income
B.
UNDERLYING PROFIT
Note
13
13
10
2013
£m
58.6
(0.3)
(0.9)
(1.3)
56.1
177.9
2.1
1.5
181.5
2012
£m
51.9
-
-
-
51.9
170.2
-
-
170.2
30.9%
30.5%
Underlying profi t is determined by excluding from the operating result certain costs of a one off nature, which do not refl ect the underlying
business performance of the Group, and fair value accounting adjustments arising from the Group’s hedging arrangements.
First Mortgages
Profi t before tax for the period (note 7)
Less: Fair value losses / (gains)
Consumer Finance
Profi t before tax for the period (note 7)
Less: Fair value losses / (gains)
Total
Profi t before tax for the period (note 7)
Less: Fair value losses / (gains)
2013
£m
65.7
(1.3)
64.4
39.7
-
39.7
105.4
(1.3)
104.1
2012
£m
63.2
(1.6)
61.6
32.3
0.3
32.6
95.5
(1.3)
94.2
148
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
t
r
o
p
e
R
l
a
u
n
n
A
e
h
t
o
t
i
s
e
c
d
n
e
p
p
A
D
C.
NET ASSET VALUE PER SHARE
Net asset value per share is derived as follows:
Total equity (£m)
Outstanding issued shares (m)
Treasury shares (m)
Shares held by ESOP schemes (m)
Note
38
46
46
2013
873.3
306.2
(0.7)
(1.9)
303.6
2012
803.5
301.8
(0.7)
(2.3)
298.8
Net asset value per £1 ordinary share
288p
269p
Annual Report & Accounts 2013
149
t
r
o
p
e
R
l
a
u
n
n
A
e
h
t
o
t
i
s
e
c
d
n
e
p
p
A
D
Contacts
Registered and Head Offi ce
51 Homer Road
Solihull
West Midlands B91 3QJ
Telephone: 0121 712 2323
Investor Relations email
investor.relations@paragon-group.co.uk
Internet
www.paragon-group.co.uk
London offi ce
Auditors
Solicitors
Tower 42 Level 12
25 Old Broad Street
London EC2N 1HQ
Deloitte LLP
Chartered Accountants
Four Brindleyplace
Birmingham B1 2HZ
Slaughter and May
One Bunhill Row
London EC1Y 8YY
Registrars and Transfer Offi ce
Computershare Investor Services PLC
Brokers
The Pavilions
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS99 6ZZ
Telephone: 0870 707 1244
Jefferies Hoare Govett
Vintners Place
68 Upper Thames Street
London EC4V 3BJ
UBS Limited
1 Finsbury Avenue
London EC2M 2PP
Remuneration consultants
New Bridge Street
Consulting actuaries
10 Devonshire Square
London EC2M 4YP
Mercer Limited
Four Brindleyplace
Birmingham B1 2JQ
150
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC
By Carbon Balancing the material used to produce this publication we have:
• Saved 1,843 Kilograms of CO2.
• Preserved 154.81 Square metres of Land.
The estimated carbon impact of this publication comes from a calculator developed by the Edinburgh
Centre of Carbon Management (ECCM). It is derived from data supplied by the paper mill or, where this
is not available, generic industry factors as determined by ECCM.
The estimated carbon impacts are measured with the point of delivery being the printer’s doorstep.
What is Carbon Balanced Paper?
Carbon Balanced, put simply, is where the carbon impact of a product or service has been estimated
and anequivalent amount of carbon dioxide is either prevented from being released or is absorbed
from the atmosphere. Carbon Balancing is facilitated by the World Land Trust, an ecological charity
which ensures a company’s peace of mind regarding the credibility and integrity of how carbon impacts
are balanced (offset). Carbon Balancing is achieved through land purchase of ecologically important
standing forests, under imminent threat of clearance, where carbon is locked that would otherwise be
released. These protected forests are then able to continue absorbing carbon from the atmosphere.
CBP00072340312132635
The Paragon Group of Companies PLC 51 Homer Road Solihull West Midlands B91 3QJ
Telephone: 0121 712 2323 www.paragon-group.co.uk Registered No. 2336032
)
3
1
0
2
/
2
1
(
7
7
9
7
P
R
G